1.4.19 Automated Underreporter Technical and Clerical Managers and Coordinators Guide

Manual Transmittal

November 21, 2023

Purpose

(1) This transmits revised IRM 1.4.19, Resource Guide for Managers, Automated Underreporter Technical and Clerical Managers and Coordinators Guide.

Material Changes

(1) IRM 1.4.19.2(3) - added 1099-LS, 1099-QA, to the bullet list and in (5) added 5498-QA to bullet list

(2) IRM 1.4.19.2.2 - title was changed to Policy Statement P-21-3 Guidelines

(3) IRM 1.4.19.2.8(2) - added IDRS command codes and clarifying instructions to (3)

(4) IRM 1.4.19.2.9(2) - new (2) to clarify FTA penalties in AUR and renumbered remaining paragraph

(5) IRM 1.4.19.3(9) - added new step 6 for text chat information

(6) IRM 1.4.19.3.1(6) - removed BT32 paragraph as well as (55) BT 89002 and renumbered paragraphs

(7) IRM 1.4.19.3.1.1(2) - removed note from step 9

(8) IRM 1.4.19.4(3) - removed paragraph

(9) IRM 1.4.19.4.1(1) - added note to include BEARS request and new (2) for the use of Aceyus

(10) IRM 1.4.19.4.6.1(1) - removed step list and added instructions to (4) on the Cisco Finesse Supervisor Desktop User Guide

(11) IRM 1.4.19.4.6.3(1) - added new (1) for Emergency button and renumbered, removed (2)a) relettered

(12) IRM 1.4.19.4.6.4(2) - added note for teleworking guidance

(13) IRM 1.4.19.4.8(2) - removed step list

(14) IRM 1.4.19.5(1) - removed note added link to (2) for the AUR Research Port IMF

(15) IRM 1.4.19.6.3(2) - added Specialized Case reviews to bullet list

(16) IRM 1.4.19.7.1 - title was changed to Individual Quality Review

(17) IRM 1.4.19.7.1(1) - added clarifying instructions

(18) IRM 1.4.19.7.1.1(2) - removed and renumbered, removed (5) and renumbered

(19) IRM 1.4.19.8(4) - removed

(20) IRM 1.4.19.8.1(1) - added menu option to bullet list and removed (2) bullet list

(21) IRM 1.4.19.9.2.1(5) - added bullet list to step 8 for status categories

(22) IRM 1.4.19.9.3(5) - added PEN STATUS CD bullet list

(23) IRM 1.4.19.9.4.5(2) - added Count to bullet list

(24) IRM 1.4.19.9.4.8(2) - added Restricted Case Code to bullet list

(25) IRM 1.4.19.9.4.10 - inserted new subsection for RB batches and renumbered remaining subsections

(26) IRM 1.4.19.9.4.10(2) - added instructions for the Source Doc field to the 5th bullet

(27) IRM 1.4.19.9.4.15(2) - revised Miscellaneous Letter Listing display

(28) IRM 1.4.19.4.21(2) - added Restricted Case Code to bullet list

(29) IRM 1.4.19.4.23 - inserted new subsection for Scanned Images and renumbered remaining subsection

(30) IRM 1.4.19.9.5.2(2) - added reports to bullet list and added (3) new step 6 to use beginning and end dates in the window display

(31) IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.6(2) - add new instructions on how to access report and renumbered

(32) IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.10(2) - removed disaster type 1 from bullet list, added (5) new step 7 for information on Current and History window selections

(33) IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.12(2) - added clarifying instructions to step 6 to input week ending dates in window

(34) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.2 - title was changed to MFT 31 Inventory Report

(35) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.2(3) - revised step list to include report information

(36) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.4 - title was changed to Specialized Batch Inventory Report

(37) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.4(3) - revised bullet list to include report information

(38) IRM 1.4.19.3.9.6.8.1(2) - removed notice/letter date from bullet list

(39) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.8.3 - changed title to Recon-Issue Listing and added to bullet list in (2)

(40) IRM 1.4.19.9.6.8.3(2) - changed 1st bullet to Reconsideration Code and 2nd bullet to Reconsideration Issue, deleted 3rd and 4th bullet

(41) IRM 1.4.19.9.8(3) - added Current Batch and Current PC to bullet list

(42) IRM 1.4.19.9.9.1(3) - added clarifying instructions to step 5 and step 6 for using a beginning and end dates in the window

(43) IRM 1.4.19.9.10(3) - added Work Unit, Sequence Number, UID, and Received Date to bullet list

(44) IRM 1.4.19.9.13(2) - added clarifying instructions to step 6 on how to bypass Phone Contact box, also clarified these steps in (3) step 5

(45) IRM 1.4.19.10.2 - removed (2), (3), and (4) and renumbered

(46) IRM 1.4.19.10.3 - removed (5) and (6) and renumbered

(47) IRM 1.4.19.11.6(1) - removed profile code 9992 from table

(48) IRM 1.4.19.12.3(2) - removed loc notice para from bullet list

(49) IRM 1.4.19.12.3.3 - added new (16) DUT Paragraph Number, (17) DUT Start Date, renumbered and added new (32) Maximum Screening Batch Count, and (33) Maximum Response Batch Count

(50) IRM 1.4.19.12.3.4(2) - added note in step 7 to not use the first name in signature line

(51) IRM 1.4.19.12.5(2) - removed step 3 from Create Message of the Day in To/Then Chart

(52) IRM 1.4.19-1 - added restricted case to table and removed area office and SGN from table

(53) IRM 1.4.19-2 - revised definitions for Misc-Open Case and Reconsideration-Closed Cases in table

(54) IRM 1.4.19-3 - revised definitions for PC 17 and PC 26 in table

(55) Changes were made throughout the IRM as follows:

  • Changed Action 61/Policy Statement P-21-3 to Policy Statement P-21-3

  • Editorial changes have been made to web-links and IRM references

  • Editorial changes made to tax years

  • Changed term his/her, he/she to gender neutral terms

  • Editorial changes for reports in Microsoft Edge window as a PDF file down-load or in the BOE window

Effect on Other Documents

This material supersedes IRM 1.4.19 dated November 15, 2022. The following IRM Procedural updates are incorporated; IPU 23U0116 (dated 01-17-2023), IPU 23U0294 (dated 02-22-2023), IPU 23U0799 (dated 07-03-2023).

Audience

AUR Managers and Coordinators at the Small Business/Self-Employed AUR sites.

Effective Date

(11-21-2023)

Heather J Yocum
Director, Examination Field and Campus Policy
Small Business/Self-Employed

Program Scope and Objectives

  1. This IRM provides guidance and procedures for Managers and AUR Coordinators using the AUR system within the AUR Operations.

  2. Purpose - This IRM describes technical guidance for the Small Business/Self Employed (SB/SE), Individual Master File (IMF) Automated Underreporter Program (AUR). Specifically, this IRM includes guidance for technical and clerical managers and AUR Coordinators for controlling work, quality measures, monitoring, reporting, and security measures in the AUR Program.

  3. Audience - The information and procedures in this IRM apply to technical and clerical Managers and Coordinators at the Small Business/Self-Employed AUR sites.

  4. Policy Owner - The IMF AUR Program is under SB/SE Examination Field and Campus Policy.

  5. Program Owner - IMF AUR Policy, under Exam Field and Campus Policy, is responsible for providing procedures to work the IMF AUR Program and for oversight of the AUR system.

  6. Primary Stakeholders - The primary stakeholders are those in the IMF AUR Program.

  7. Program Goals - Program goals for this type of work is to monitor inventory to be worked within specific time frames.

Background

  1. This IRM provides instructions for Automated Underreporter (AUR) managers (Technical and Clerical) and coordinators to control the flow of work, perform managerial reviews, and to monitor and generate reports. Managers verify errors found by review, ensure corrective action, monitor security reports, and keep the user data updated, ensuring proper security procedures are followed.

Authority

  1. Chapter 61 of the Internal Revenue Code (Information and Returns), Subchapter A (Records and Returns), Part III (Information Returns), sections 6031 – 6059, contain the requirements for the filing of information returns for income reporting purposes. Rev. Proc. 2005-32 identifies taxpayer contacts to verify a discrepancy between the taxpayer’s tax return and an information return, or between a tax return and information otherwise in the Service’s possession as taxpayer contacts and other actions not considered an examination, inspection or reopening.

Responsibilities

  1. The Director, Exam Field and Campus, Small Business/Self Employed, is the executive responsible for the IMF AUR Program.

  2. The AUR Program Manager, Headquarters Examination Operations, Field and Campus Policy, IMF AUR Policy is the executive responsible for IMF AUR policy and the procedures in this IRM.

Terms and Acronyms

  1. For a list of Terms and Acronyms see Exhibit 1.4.19-1, Glossary and Abbreviations.

Overview

  1. Automated Underreporter (AUR) cases are built from two primary sources: the Individual Master File (IMF) which contains information reported to IRS by taxpayers on Form 1040, U.S. Individual Income Tax Return, Form 1040-SR, U.S. Individual Income Tax Return for Seniors and the Information Returns Master File (IRMF) which contains information submitted by payers of Form W-2, Wage and Tax Statement, Form 1099-DIV, Dividends and Distributions, Form 1099-INT, Interest Income, and others. The IRMF is matched with the IMF to verify all income is reported. Underreporter cases result when computer analysis detects a discrepancy between the two data sources.

  2. The information documents in the W-2 series should be attached to the tax return when it is filed. These documents include:

    • Form W-2, Wage and Tax Statement

    • Form W-2 C, Statement of Corrected Income and Tax Amounts

    • Form W-2 G, Certain Gambling Winnings

  3. The information documents in the Form 1099 series are not required to be attached to the tax return when it is filed. These documents include:

    • Form Title
      Form 1099-A Acquisition or Abandonment of Secured Property
      Form 1099-B Proceeds from Broker and Barter Exchange Transactions
      Form 1099-C Cancellation of Debt
      Form 1099-DIV Dividends and Distributions
      Form 1099-G Certain Government Payments
      Form 1099-INT Interest Income
      Form 1099-K Payment Card and Third-Party Payments
      Form 1099-LS Reportable Life Insurance Sale
      Form 1099-LTC Long Term Care and Accelerated Death Benefits
      Form 1099-MISC Miscellaneous Income
      Form 1099-NEC Nonemployee Compensation
      Form 1099-OlD Original Issue Discount
      Form 1099-PATR Taxable Distributions Received from Cooperatives
      Form 1099-Q Payments from Qualified Education Programs (Under Section 529 and 530)
      Form 1099-QA Distribution from ABLE Accounts
      Form 1099-R Distributions from Pensions, Annuities, Retirement or Profit-sharing Plans, IRAs, Insurance Contracts, etc.

      Note:

      Form 1099-R should be attached if there is tax withheld

      Form RRB-1099 Payments by the Railroad Retirement Board
      Form 1099-S Proceeds From Real Estate Transaction
      Form 1099-SA Distributions from an HSA, Archer MSA, or Medicare MSA
      Form 1099-SSA Social Security Benefits
      Form 1099-SB Seller’s Investment in Life Insurance Contract

  4. The schedules in the Schedule K-1 series are not required to be attached to the tax return when it is filed. The Schedule K-1s include:

    • Form 1041, U.S. Income Tax Return for Estates & Trusts

    • Form 1065, U.S. Return of Partnership Income, Partner’s Share of Income, Credits, Deductions, etc.

    • Form 1120-S, U.S. Income Tax Return for an S Corporation, Shareholder’s Share of Income Credits, Deductions, etc.

  5. Other information documents not required to be attached to the tax return when it is filed include:

    • Form 1098, Mortgage Interest Statement

    • Form 1098-E, Student Loan Interest Statement

    • Form 1098-T, Tuition Statement

    • Form 5498, IRA Contribution Information

    • Form 5498-ESA, Coverdell ESA Contribution Information

    • Form 5498-QA, Account Contribution Information

    • Form 5498-SA, HSA, Archer MSA, or Medicare Advantage MSA Information

  6. Discrepant cases are grouped by the following:

    • Subfile - a specific group of taxpayer returns with like issues, regardless of income type

    • Category - a specific type of discrepancy (income, adjustments to income, credits.)

    • Sub-category - range of potential tax change

      Note:

      For a list of Category, Subfiles and Sub-categories see Exhibit 1.4.19-9, AUR Category Code Description/Chart. These categories and sub-categories provided a logical system of criteria to select cases from the available inventory.

  7. Cases are selected at the Headquarters level for each site utilizing the inventory selection tool. The inventory is then controlled by each AUR campus.

    1. The Computing Centers (Enterprise Computing Center at Martinsburg (ECC-MTB) and Enterprise Computing Center at Memphis (ECC-MEM)) send tape information from the IRMF, Return Transaction File (RTF), Taxpayer Information File (TIF), and Payer Agent File. This information is downloaded to the AUR system.

      Note:

      Data from the TIF and Payer Agent File is updated weekly.

    2. A computer tape containing Form 4251 (Return Charge-Out) data is printed on a campus printer. Each Form 4251 contains a social security number (SSN), tax year, and other case identification information, represented on a bar code in numeric format. Returns are pulled by Federal Records Centers (FRC) and forwarded to the Campuses.

      Note:

      Charge-outs are not printed for cases in Subfile J, (Auto Generated Notices (AGN)), electronically filed returns (ELF).

    3. All ELF cases are auto batched into Screening Batch Types (BTs) 01 - 19 and are identified as "Virtual batches" (no physical case). The batches are systemically closed and updated to "AB" status. A batch and work unit listing is available to print. Tax examiners (TEs) input the Process Codes (PCs) on the individual work unit listing and the clerks Release Batch (RB).

    4. Returns are controlled into the AUR system by scanning the bar code information of Form 4251 with a bar code scanner or by entering the SSN.

  8. After cases are selected from the inventory, they are worked according to procedures in IRM 4.19.3, IMF Automated Underreporter Program.

  9. Cases with paper returns are received and built into the AUR system by the clerical function. As paper cases are built into Screening Batch Types (BTs) 01 - 19 they are controlled in the AUR system. Screening batches are requested by technical units to be worked.

  10. Tax examiners perform an in-depth analysis of each case. If the identified discrepant amount is resolved, the case is closed with no taxpayer contact. If the discrepant amount was not included on the return or otherwise resolved, the taxpayer is sent one of the following:

    • Letter 2893-C - a letter generated for confirmed and appropriate Federal Withholding (W/H) and/or Excess Social Security Tax (SST)

    • CP 2501 - an initial contact letter (no tax calculation) requesting additional information or a

    • CP 2000 - a proposal to change tax which includes calculations and explanations

    • CP 3219A- Statutory Notice of Deficiency.

  11. Process codes are codes used to provide an audit trail for AUR case processing. Integrated Data Retrieval System (IDRS) reflects AUR PCs as pending actions until they post to Master File. AUR PCs follow the transaction code (TC) 922 string listed on IDRS. PCs designated to generate notices (CP 2000 and CP 2501) and Statutory (Stat) Notices update the existing control base.

  12. There are other PCs input during AUR processing that do not generate notices. These PCs may require the case to be released from the work unit prior to batch release. For a complete list of PCs see Exhibit 1.4.19-3, AUR Process Codes.

  13. Internal Process Codes (IPCs) are codes used to internally route cases requiring research, letters, or referral. A complete list of IPCs can be found in Exhibit 1.4.19-2, AUR Internal Process Codes.

  14. For a list of abbreviations and definitions used in AUR processing, see Exhibit 1.4.19-1, Glossary and Abbreviations.

AUR System Problem Reporting Procedures

  1. Refer any AUR system problems to the AUR Coordinator. If after researching the issue, the AUR Coordinator is unable to resolve the problem the issue is elevated to the appropriate Headquarters (HQ) Analyst(s) using the HQ Referral form.

Policy Statement P-21-3 Guidelines

  1. Policy Statement P-21-3 Guidelines (also referred to as Action 61) are the result of a task force initiated to provide timely and quality responses to taxpayer correspondence. For general guidelines refer to IRM 4.19.3.22.1.5, Policy Statement P-21-3.

Archived Cases

  1. The AUR system maintains an archived file of AUR cases for 10 years.

  2. Cases from any site can be accessed using View Case in the appropriate tax year on the system.

  3. For TY 2013 and prior if information on the case is needed, the case must be ordered from files.

Spousal Notices

  1. A second CP 2501 or CP 2000 notice may be generated for the spouse whenever the secondary spouse's address has changed from the AUR tax year to the year of the latest filed return. The second notice is an exact duplicate of all the information contained in the original notice mailed to the primary taxpayer with the exception that the second notice contains the current address of the potential/probable ex-spouse.

  2. Stat Notices are generated to each spouse, regardless of most recent address of record.

Statute of Limitations

  1. In general, assessments must be made within three (3) years after the return due date or filing date, whichever is later. An assessment may be made within six (6) years if there is a substantial omission, 25 percent or more per IRC 6501(e), of gross income.

  2. The statute can be extended by a mutual written agreement between the IRS and the taxpayer(s) via Form 872, Consent to Extend the Time to Assess Tax.

  3. The statute is suspended by the issuance of a Statutory Notice of Deficiency (90 day) Waiver.

    Note:

    Statute cases and the use of Form 872 should be kept to a minimum. However, if it is not possible to timely work and/or timely close these cases, Form 872 should be used.

  4. A request for prompt assessment of tax on the estate of a deceased taxpayer limits the statute period for assessment of tax to 18 months after the written request is properly filed or to the normal statute date, whichever is earlier.

  5. Statute awareness is a vital process to the performance of identifying statute cases in the Internal Revenue Service operations. The Statute Awareness Program was created to minimize barred assessments and erroneous abatements. For information on conditions which may extend the assessment statute expiration date (ASED), refund statute expiration date (RSED), or collection statute expiration date (CSED), see IRM 25.6, Statute of Limitations.

  6. Employees who deal with statute related issues must be able to identify statute imminent or expired periods for assessing, refunding, and collecting tax on Individual Master File (IMF), Business Master File (BMF), and Individual Retirement Account File (IRAF) accounts.

  7. If less than 90 days remain until the ASED, prepare the case for adjustment using Form 2859, Request for Quick or Prompt Assessment, and route to the RACS function for input. Cases indicating a decrease in tax, previously assessed by AUR, are resolved by the AUR reconsideration function. See IRM 21.5.3, General Claims Procedures, for Category A criteria and claim disallowance procedures.

Balanced Measurement System

  1. The Balanced Measurement System provides guidance for all functions of the IRS and contributes to the focus for work performed in the AUR function.

  2. The Balanced Measures are described below:

    1. Provide accurate and professional services to internal and external customers in a courteous, timely manner.

    2. Empower employee engagement and high-quality productivity through motivational leadership, effective support services, and timely delivery of first-class training programs.

    3. Generate a productive quantity of work in a quality manner and provide meaningful outreach to all customers.

Maintaining Documents In AUR

  1. Form 3210 - Document Transmittal - Correspondence, teletype, transmittal letters, reports, transmittal receipt and control documents, pertaining to receiving, controlling and transmitting tax returns, taxpayer account registers, and related documents should be maintained within the Operation for one-year from the date the transmittal was prepared. After the one-year period, Form 3210 can be destroyed in accordance with Document 12990, IRS Record Control Schedule (RCS) 23, Item Number 36.

Integrated Automation Technologies (IAT)

  1. Automated Underreporter employees are mandated to use the Integrated Automation Technologies (IAT) tools. When an action must be taken on IDRS (unable to complete the action within the AUR system) and an IAT tool is available, AUR employees with access to IAT tools are required to complete the action using the IAT tool. The IAT tools assist the tax examiner (TE) with IDRS research and input.

    Note:

    If an IAT tool is not functioning properly, the case should be worked using IDRS.

  2. To avoid IDRS security violations, the following command codes must be in the employee’s profile in order to utilize the "xMend" IAT tool: ACTON, ADJ54, AMDIS, CFINK, DDBKD, DUPOL, ENMOD, ENREQ, FRM77, IMFOL, INOLE, IRPTR, LETER, LPAGE, MFREQ, REQ77, RTVUE, STAUP, SUMRY, TXCMP, TRDBV, and TXMOD. Other command codes may be optional depending on the action being performed.

  3. Ensure the IRS Command Codes are established prior to utilizing the IAT tool. To research a specific IAT function, or access IAT job aids, See, https://irsgov.sharepoint.com/sites/IAT.

Managerial Approval for Accuracy Related Penalties

  1. If the TP response includes a request to abate an Accuracy Related penalty (either Negligence or Substantial Understatement) and the tax examiner determines the abatement will not be granted, written managerial approval is required. See IRM 4.19.3.22.1.4, Accuracy Related Penalties, for additional information. The approval must be done at the time the tax examiner determines to continue processing the case AND must be done by a manager

  2. An administrative waiver for certain penalties was implemented in 2001 for tax periods with ending dates after December 31, 2000. It is referred to as First Time Abate (FTA) and is available for penalty relief the first time a taxpayer is subject to certain penalties for a single return filed by the taxpayer. The AUR program DOES NOT grant penalty relief under FTA. If the taxpayer is requesting FTA for the failure to file, failure to pay, or other penalties and submitted Form 843, Claim for Refund and Request for Abatement, the request is sent to Accounts Management for processing.

  3. To document the managerial approval to assert the penalty, the manager accesses the Case Note window in AUR (see IRM 4.19.7, IMF Automated Underreporter (AUR) Technical System Procedures - Creating a Case Note, for additional information) and selects the standard case note. Once committed, the case note will append to the case with the approving managers SEID.

Controlling Work - Batch and Case Overview

  1. AUR cases to be analyzed by AUR Tax Examiners (TEs) are built into batches, each batch is divided into work units. It is the manager’s responsibility to monitor and control work coming through their unit.

  2. After all cases in the batch have been worked, the batches are released from the technical unit to the clerical function for appropriate action.

  3. Each batch is identified with a five-digit number.

    1. The first two digits of the batch number are used to describe the batch type.

    2. The next three digits are used to describe the sequential number of a regular batch (001 through 999), or the Unit Location Number of a Unit Suspense Batch (Batch Types (BT) 36, 42, 45, 62, 65, 75, 77, 82, or 92).

  4. Each case is assigned a nine-digit case sequence number (CSN). The CSN corresponds to the location of a case within a batch. A CSN is composed of different elements dependent upon whether the case is in a suspense batch or a regular batch.

  5. The CSN of a regular batch consists of four sections. The description of the numbers in sequence are:

    1. The first two numbers are the batch type.

    2. The next three numbers are the batch sequence number.

    3. The next two numbers are the work unit containing the case.

    4. The last two numbers are for the document number within the work unit.

    Exception:

    Cases assigned to the TEs individual unit suspense do not contain a work unit number or document number as listed in steps 3 and 4 above.

  6. The CSN of a suspense batch consists of three sections. The description of numbers in sequence are:

    1. The first two numbers are the batch type.

    2. The next three numbers are the batch sequence or the location of a Unit Suspense Batch.

    3. The last four numbers are the sequence number of a case within the batch. When the document number reaches 9,999 the batch sequence number increases by one and the document number within the batch starts at 0001.

      Note:

      Cases assigned to the TEs individual unit suspense only contain the batch number, they do not have a work unit or document number within the work unit.

  7. The CSN is displayed on the Case History Screen.

  8. The CSN is valid for locating a case as long as the original batch remains intact and in order during processing. If a case is removed from its original location in the batch and is not returned to it, the CSN is not valid for locating the case. A new CSN is assigned when the case is built to a new batch.

  9. To view the history of a case anywhere on the AUR system:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case history from the drop down menu. The History/View/Request window displays.

    4. Enter the SSN.

    5. If the case is a phone case, click in the PHONE CONTACT box, otherwise press <Enter>.

    6. If the case is a text chat contact, click in the TEXT CHAT box, otherwise press <Enter>.

  10. Clerical queries and searches the status of a case by taking the following action:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Case history from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request window displays.

    5. Enter the SSN.

    6. Press <Enter> twice.

  11. The batch status code defines the status of the batch at any time during processing. See Exhibit 1.4.19-10, Batch Status Codes, for a list of acceptable batch status codes and their meanings.

Batch Types

  1. Batch Types 01 - 19 - Screening Association - The AUR inventory is ordered in groups referred to as extracts. As case information for these extracts is downloaded into AUR, it is assigned a batch type number ranging sequentially from 01 through 19. These digits represent the extract number.

    1. ELF cases are identified as "VIRTUAL" (V) cases. The system auto-batches these cases into extract batches 01XXX - 19XXX. The batches are identified with a "V" to the left of the batch number on the Batch Inventory Report.

    2. The clerical function builds all paper returns into the initial screening batches and holds them until requested by a technical unit through the Batch Request option.

  2. Batch Types 27 - Auto-Generated Notice - Certain AUR inventories bypass the physical analysis/screening phase of the program and have CP 2000 s systemically generated. This process is referred to as Auto-Generated Notices (AGN). These cases systemically move to BT27. No clerical action is required for these cases during analysis batch building.

  3. Batch Type 29 - Priority Screening - Screening cases in this batch type may require expedited processing. Technical managers should follow campus direction for requesting these batches.

  4. Batch Type 30 - Missing Return Suspense - There are two types of cases built to BT 30:

    • Cases where FRC pulled the wrong document locator number (DLN) (IPC WP).

    • Cases where the system has reordered the return automatically based on the reorder date input by the AUR Coordinator. IPC 0A is generated when the system reorders the return.

    Note:

    If the returns are not built to BT 31 (Complete Screening Cases) within 60 days, the cases are systemically closed with PC 29, an Unavailable Return Report is generated.

  5. Batch Type 31 - Complete Screening Cases - Cases previously assigned to BT 30 are built to BT 31 when the return or data is received. These batches are available for processing by technical units.

  6. Batch Type 33 - Screening Research Complete - Cases previously assigned to BT 34 and BT 35 are built into BT 33 when the requested research is received. These batches are available for processing by technical units. The cases have IPC 0A, additional return requested.

  7. Batch Type 34 - Screening Research Suspense - Screening Research Suspense Batch numbers are 34000 - 34599, requests for additional return (IPC 0A). The Aged Screening Research Pull List is generated weekly for cases not completed within 60 days from the request date. The cases are systemically closed with PC 29.

    Exception:

    Filing status 3 (married filing separate) cases do not automatically close if the research is not received. These cases are assigned to BT 33 and are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  8. Batch Type 35 - Miscellaneous Referrals - Cases requiring additional technical assistance are built into this batch. These cases must have a current IPC 0D. These batches are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  9. Batch Type 36 - Screening Unit Suspense - Cases which require technical determination by the manager or lead are transferred by the TE to their Screening Unit Suspense. The system automatically generates IPC 0E and moves the cases to the unit suspense batch. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and manager/lead TE to ensure timely actions are taken. Cases are held in the unit until the issue is resolved and the case is released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

  10. Batch Type 37 - Released Unit Suspense - Completed cases from BT 36 are released to the designated area for clerical retrieval. The clerical function builds the cases into BT 37, verifies the PC/IPC, and releases the cases to the appropriate area based on the PC/IPC.

  11. Batch Type 38 - Remail CP 2000/Recomp - During the batch building process for BT 59, undeliverable CP 2000 and recomputation notice cases with an address update are rejected by the system. The clerical function builds these cases into BT 38. When a better address is identified the system assigns new notice dates and generates amended notices. The system moves the cases to Recomp/Amended/PC55 Suspense BT 55.

  12. Batch Type 39 - Screening Rejects - When a notice is rejected, the clerical function pulls the case from the suspense file and builds into BT 39. These batches are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  13. Batch Type 40 - CP 2501 Suspense - During the systemic batch disassembly process, cases with a current PC 30 are systemically assigned to BT 40 in CSN order. The cases remain in BT 40 until a response is received, the notice is returned undeliverable, or the suspense timeframe expires.

  14. Batch Type 41 - CP 2501 Identity Theft (IDT) Response -CP 2501 responses with an indication of identity theft are built into separate BT 41 by the clerical function. These batch numbers are provided to the AUR Coordinator. BT 41 may only have one IRS received dates.

  15. Batch Type 42 - CP 2501 Unit Research Suspense - Cases with IPC 3A are systemically assigned to the appropriate unit suspense batch based on the IPC and the TEs SEID. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and the manager/lead TE to ensure the requested research is received and timely actions are taken. Completed cases are released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

  16. Batch Type 43 - CP 2501 Miscellaneous Referrals -CP 2501 response cases requiring technical assistance are assigned IPC 3D. The clerical function builds the cases to BT 43. The batches are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  17. Batch Type 44 - CP 2501 Response -CP 2501 cases receiving a taxpayer response with no indication of identity theft are built to BT 44 by the clerical function and are available for request and processing by technical units. BT 44 may have multiple IRS received dates.

  18. Batch Type 45 - CP 2501 Unit Suspense - Cases requested by the TE and cases which require technical determination by the manager or lead (transferred by the TE to their CP 2000 Unit Suspense) are systemically assigned to BT 45. The system automatically generates IPC 3E and moves the cases to the unit suspense batch. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and manager/lead TE to ensure timely actions are taken. Cases are held in the unit until the issue is resolved and the case is released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

    Note:

    Cases with a CSN of 45950 indicates the case is a Universal Work Case (UWC).

  19. Batch Type 46 - CP 2501 Response Release - Completed cases from Unit Suspense (BT 42 and BT 45) are released to the designated area for clerical retrieval. The clerical function builds these cases into BT 46, verifies the PC/IPC and releases the cases to the appropriate area based on the PC/IPC.

  20. Batch Type 47 - CP 2501 Letter Suspense - During the systemic batch disassembly process, CP 2501 cases requiring a letter are systemically assigned to BT 47 based on the assignment of IPC 3L and 3S by the TE. The cases are filed in CSN order based on the letter date and remain in BT 47 until a response is received, the letter is returned as undeliverable, or the suspense timeframe expires.

  21. Batch Type 49 - CP 2501 No Response Auto Purge - Cases not receiving a taxpayer response within the suspense timeframe and are not identified by the system as requiring a TE to review, are systemically assigned to BT 49. The system automatically updates the PC to 57 to generate a CP 2000 Notice. BT 49 is not requested or processed by the technical units.

  22. Batch Type 50 - CP 2000 Suspense - Cases with a current PC 55 and no amended indicator are systemically assigned to BT 50. The cases are filed in CSN order based on notice date and remain in this suspense batch until a response is received, the notice is returned undeliverable, or the suspense timeframe expires.

  23. Batch Type 51 - CP 2000/Recomp Agreed Response -CP 2000 and Recomputation notices receiving fully agreed responses are built into BT 51 by the clerical function. When clerical updates the batch to "RB" status, the system automatically changes the PC to 67, creates and posts the assessment record, and closes the IDRS control base on these cases. BT 51 may have multiple IRS received dates.

  24. Batch Type 52 - CP 2000/Recomp Disagreed Response - Disagreed CP 2000 and recomputation notice response cases are built into BT 52 by the clerical function. The batches are available for request and processing by the technical units. Each BT 52 has one IRS Received Date.

    Note:

    Separate BT (52,53,58) are built for identity theft responses which require priority handling.

  25. Batch Type 53 - CP 2000/Recomp Priority Response - Fully agreed and/or disagreed CP 2000 and Amended CP 2000 response cases may be built into BT 53 based on an IRS received date of 20 or more days old. BT 53 is available for request and processing by the technical units. BT 53 may have multiple IRS Received Dates.

    Note:

    Separate BT (52,53,58) are built for identity theft responses which require priority handling.

    Note:

    Local management has the option to batch fully agreed cases with an IRS received date of 20 days or more to BT 51.

  26. Batch Type 55 - Recomputed Amended/PC 57 CP 2000 Suspense - During the systemic batch disassembly process, cases with the following PCs are systemically assigned to Recomputed CP 2000 Suspense (BT 55):

    • PC 55 - CP 2000s with a manual interest calculation

    • PC 55A - Amended CP 2000

    • PC 57 - CP 2000s issued after a CP 2501

    • PC 59 - Recomputed CP 2000s

    Note:

    These cases are filed in CSN order and receive new folders (if paper return or correspondence is present). Cases remain in this batch until a response is received, the notice is returned as undeliverable, or the suspense timeframe expires.

  27. Batch Type 58 - Late CP 2000 Response (Stat Generated) - Cases where a Stat Notice has been generated but has not been mailed due to receipt of a response are built into BT 58. When cases are built into BT 58 the Stat Notice is stopped. These batches are available for request and processing by the technical units. BT 58 may have multiple IRS received dates.

    • Separate BT (52,53,58) are built for identity theft responses which require priority handling.

    • If response does not build to BT 58, clerical holds the case until the Stat Notice date and then builds to the appropriate stat response batch.

    • Once a case has been built to BT 58, it cannot be transferred out of the batch, doing so causes issues with stopping the Stat notice.

  28. Batch Type 59 - Aged CP 2000 Stat Preparation -CP 2000, recomputation notice, or IPC 6L or 6S cases, which have either met the suspense timeframes or are true undeliverables, are systemically assigned to BT 59. The system automatically updates the PC to 75 to generate a Stat Notice. BT 59 is not requested or processed by the technical units.

  29. Batch Type 60 - CP 2000 Letter Suspense - During the systemic batch disassembly process, CP 2000 cases requiring a letter are systemically assigned to BT 60 based on the assignment of IPC 6L or 6S. These cases are filed in CSN order based on the letter date and remain in BT 60 until a response is received, the letter is returned as undeliverable, or the suspense timeframe expires.

  30. Batch Type 61 - Manual Interest Rejects - Cases previously processed and rejected are built into BT 61 and are available for request and processing by technical units. The interest computation date, determined by local management, is input by the tax examiner when the batch is updated to "AU" status.

    Note:

    These batches MUST be released timely to avoid missing the notice date. If the notice date is missed these cases have to be reworked.

  31. Batch Type 62 - CP 2000 Unit Research Suspense - Cases with IPC 6A are systemically assigned to the appropriate unit suspense batch based on the IPC and the TEs SEID. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and the manager/lead TE to ensure the requested research is received and timely actions are taken. Completed cases are released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

  32. Batch Type 63 - CP 2000 Miscellaneous Referral -CP 2000, recomputation notice, or IPC 6L or 6S responses requiring technical assistance are built into BT 63. The current IPC must be 6D. These cases are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  33. Batch Type 65 - CP 2000 Unit Suspense - Cases requested by the TE and cases which require technical determination by the manager or lead (transferred by the TE to their CP 2000 Unit Suspense) are systemically assigned to BT 65. The system automatically generates IPC 6E and moves the cases to the unit suspense batch. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and manager/lead TE to ensure timely actions are taken. Cases are held in the unit until the issue is resolved and the case is released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

    Note:

    Cases with a CSN of 65950 indicates the case is a UWC.

  34. Batch Type 66 - CP 2000 Response Release - Completed cases from BT 62 and/or BT 65 are released to a designated area for clerical retrieval. The clerical function builds the cases into BT 66, verifies the PC/IPC, and releases the cases to the appropriate area based on the PC/IPC.

  35. Batch Type 67 - Partially Agreed - Cases assigned IPC RN (Partially agreed response) are built into BT 67. When the batch is updated to "AB" status, the IPC RN/CR is converted to PC 59/57. After 7 days clerical updates the batch to "RB" status, the system updates the case to PC 67 and creates and posts an automatic assessment record. If the batch has not been updated to "RB" status after two cycles the system generates a Partially Agreed Aging Report.

    Note:

    The auto assessment report does not generate for BT 67.

  36. Batch Type 68 - Manual Stat Prep - Undeliverable Stat Notice cases with a post office forwarding address or a new address on the system and cases the TE has identified as requiring a manual Stat Notice (PC 77) are built into BT 68. Manual notices are prepared by the tax examiner who input the PC 77 or by the locally designated employee. BT 68 is not requested or processed by the technical units.

  37. Batch Type 70 - Statutory Notice Suspense - During the systemic batch disassembly process, the system assigns cases with a PC/IPC 75, 77, 95, 8L, 8S, or 8M into Stat Notice Suspense (BT 70). The cases are filed in CSN order based on the notice date and remain in the suspense batch until a response is received or the suspense timeframe expires.

  38. Batch Type 71 - Statutory Notice Agreed Response - Statutory notice cases receiving fully agreed responses are built into BT 71 by the clerical function. When the clerk updates the batch to "RB" status, the system automatically updates the PC to 87, creates and posts an automatic assessment record. BT 71 may have multiple IRS Received Dates.

    Note:

    The auto assessment report does not generate for BT 71.

  39. Batch Type 72 - Statutory Identity Theft (IDT) Response - Disagreed Stat Notice responses with an indication of identity theft are built into BT 72. The batch numbers are provided to the AUR Coordinator. BT 72 may have multiple IRS received dates.

  40. Batch Type 73 - Statutory Notice Miscellaneous Referral - Stat Notice cases requiring technical assistance are built into BT 73. The current IPC must be 8D. BTs 73 are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  41. Batch Type 74 - Statutory Notice Response - Disagreed Stat Notice response cases can be built into BT 74. BTs 74 are available for request and processing by the technical units. BT 74 may have multiple IRS received dates.

    Note:

    Local management has the option to use BT 71 for fully agreed responses with a PC 75 or 77, regardless of the IRS received date.

  42. Batch Type 75 - Statutory Notice Unit Suspense - Cases requested by the TE and cases which require technical determination by the manager or lead (transferred by the TE to their Statutory Notice Unit Suspense) are systemically assigned to BT 75. The system automatically generates IPC 6E and moves the cases to the unit suspense batch. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and manager/lead TE to ensure timely actions are taken. Completed cases are released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

    Note:

    Cases with a CSN of 75950 indicate the case is a UWC.

  43. Batch Type 77 - Statutory Notice Unit Research Suspense - Cases with IPC 8A are systemically assigned to the appropriate unit suspense batch, based on the IPC and the TE's SEID. These cases are suspended in the unit and should be monitored by the TE and manager/lead TE to ensure the requested research is received and timely actions are taken. Completed cases are released to the unit’s designated area for clerical retrieval.

  44. Batch Type 79 - Statutory Notice Defaults - Stat Notice cases (PC 75, 95, and IPC 8L, 8S) having met the suspense timeframes are systemically assigned to BT 79. When the clerk updates the batch to "RB" status, the system automatically updates the PC to 90 and creates and posts an automatic assessment record.

  45. Batch Type 81 - Reconsideration - For any year available on the AUR system, responses received for closed cases in BT 96 can be built to BT 81. These batches are available for request and processing by the technical units. For TY 2012 - 2016 BT 81 is segmented to control and monitor Identity Theft Cases, see a - b below.

    Caution:

    DO NOT "RB" BT 81.

    1. Batch Type 81001 - 81499 - (Reconsiderations) - TY 2013 - 2017 - Correspondence for closed cases from BT 9600X for tax years 2013 - 2017 can be built to BT 81001 - 81499. BT 81 is used to control, monitor and track correspondence for closed cases received in AUR for reconsideration of the assessment.

    2. Batch Type 81500 - 81949 - (Identity Theft Reconsiderations) - TY 2013 - 2017 - Correspondence for closed cases from BT 9600X for tax years 2013 - 2017 where identity theft is an issue can be built to BT 81500-949. BT 81500 - 81949 is used to control, monitor and track correspondence for closed identity theft cases received in AUR for reconsideration of the assessment.

      Note:

      All identity theft cases receive priority handling.

  46. Batch Type 82 Reconsideration Suspense - Reconsideration cases in BT 81 requiring subsequent correspondence or research are systemically assigned to BT 82 upon input of IPC 9A, 9E or 9L.

  47. Batch Type 83 Employee URP Reconsideration Suspense -Correspondence for closed Employee URP cases from BT 9600X for tax years 2014 and subsequent for can be built to BT 83.

  48. Batch Type 84 - Cases with New Actions - Cases the system has identified with new actions since batches or cases were released by the tax examining units are built to BT 84 as follows:

    Batch Segments Definitions
    84001-84299 Screening Cases with New Actions
    84300-84448 CP 2501 Cases with New Actions
    84449-84499 CP 2501 IDT Cases with New Actions
    84500-84748 CP 2000 Cases with New Actions
    84749-84799 CP 2000 IDT Cases with New Actions
    84800-84948 Statutory Notice Cases with New Actions
    84949-84999 Statutory Notice IDT Cases with New Actions
    These batches are available for request and processing by the technical units.

  49. Batch Type 85 - Remail Statutory Notices - Stat Notices returned by the Post Office as undeliverable are targeted to BT 85. To be accepted in BT 85, the case must have a PC 75 and a system identified new address present since the Stat was mailed to the taxpayer.

    1. Build undeliverable Stats with PC 77 to BT 68. During the batch building process (BT 85), the system checks each SSN for a new address. If a new address is present, the SSN is accepted into the batch. When the batch is updated to "RB" status, the AUR system automatically generates a request for a new Stat Notice to the new address. If there is no better address or if the case is other than PC 75, the system does not accept the SSN in BT 85.

    2. Refused or unclaimed Stats are systemically marked with an undeliverable indicator "X" . The system displays the following error message: "ERROR: Stat notice was unclaimed or refused. Dispose of Stat as classified waste." These undelivered notices do not need to be interfiled and should be discarded in accordance with local classified waste procedures.

  50. Batch Type 86 - Statutory Notice Response Release - Completed cases from BT 75 or BT 77 are released to a designated area for clerical retrieval. The clerical function builds the cases into BT 86, verifies PC/IPC, and releases the cases to the appropriate area based on the PC/IPC.

  51. Batch Type 87 - Partial Agreed Statutory Notices - Cases assigned IPC SR/DR (Partially agreed Stat Notices) are built into BT 87. When the batch is updated to "AB" status, the IPC SR/DR is converted to PC 95. After 7 days clerical updates the batch to "RB" status, the system updates the case to PC 87/90, creates and posts an automatic assessment record. If the batch has not been updated to "RB" status after two cycles the system generates a Partially Agreed Aging Report.

    Note:

    The auto assessment report does not generate for BT 87.

  52. Batch Type 88- Reconsideration Cases with No Assessments - Clerical builds reconsideration cases to BT88 when responses do not require examiner adjustments due to a copy of CP 2000, duplicate response, refile signature document and subsequent payment.

  53. Batch Type 89001 - Bankruptcy Suspense Cases - Cases where a PC 98 is entered are systemically assigned to BT 89001. These cases are monitored by the bankruptcy coordinator and remain in this suspense batch until processing is completed.

  54. Batch Type 89003 - Identity Theft Suspense Cases - Cases where an IPC SI is entered are systemically assigned to BT 89003. These cases are monitored by the AUR IDT liaison and remain in this suspense batch until processing is complete.

  55. Batch Type 89004 - Statutory Suspense - MFJ - Only One TP Signature on Consent - During the systemic batch disassembly process, Statutory Notice cases where only one TP has signed the consent to tax increase are systemically assigned to BT 89004 based on the assignment of IPC S3.

  56. Batch Type 89005 - Suspense - MFJ - Only One TP Signature on Consent - During the systemic batch disassembly process, CP 2000 cases where only one TP has signed the consent to tax increase are systemically assigned to BT 89005 based on the assignment of IPC S6.

  57. Batch Type 89006 - Statutory Suspense MFJ - Only One TP Filed Petition - During the systemic batch disassembly process, Statutory Notice cases where only one TP has filed a petition with the U.S. Tax Court are systemically assigned to BT 89006 based on the assignment of IPC S8.

  58. Batch Type 90 - Employee Screening - Employee cases downloaded to the AUR system are built into BT 90. The employee designated to work employee cases builds these cases to this batch type.

  59. Batch Type 91 - Employee Suspense - Employee cases, which the designated TE has issued CP 2501, CP 2000, Recomputation Notice, Stat Notice, or sent a letter to the taxpayer, are built into BT 91. The employee designated to work employee cases builds these cases to this batch type. These cases remain in this batch type until they are closed.

  60. Batch Type 92 - Employee Unit Suspense - Employee cases the system identifies during processing which require a technical determination or additional information and employee cases with IPC LC or LR are built into BT 92. The employee designated to work employee cases builds these cases to this batch type. Cases can have notices or letters issued. These cases remain in BT 92 until they are closed.

  61. Batch Type 93 - Declared Disaster - During processing, cases identified with a disaster zip code are built into BT 93. Disaster batches cannot be closed until after the disaster end date when the clerical function updates the batches to continue AUR case processing. BT 93 is divided as follows:

    • 93001-299 - Screening Disaster Suspense

    • 93300-399 - CP 2501 Disaster Suspense

    • 93400-699 - CP 2000 Disaster Suspense

    • 93700-799 - CP 2000 Stat Prep Disaster Suspense

    • 93800-899 - Stat Disaster Suspense

    • 93900-999 - Stat Disaster Default Suspense (PC 90 input by TE)

  62. Batch Type 94 - Fraud Referral Suspense - When the TE determines a case meets potential fraud criteria, IPC 3F, 6F or 8F is assigned. The system automatically assigns cases with these IPCs to BT 94 during systemic batch disassembly. BT 94 is made available for review by the Examination Operation.

  63. Batch Type 95 - Review - Cases identified for review are built into this batch type as follows:

    • BT 95001-199 - Reserved

    • BT 95200-399 - CP 2000 Notice Review

    • BT 95400-499 - Reserved

    • BT 95500-599 - CP 2000 Sort Code/Override Indicator Review

    • BT 95600-799 - Pre-Stat Notice Review

    • BT 95800-999 - Stat Recomp/Sort Code Review

  64. Batch Type 96 - Closure Suspense - Cases with a closure PC are systemically assigned to BT 96001 when the clerk updates the batch to "RB" status.

    Note:

    Closed Reconsideration cases are systemically assigned to BT 96002 upon assignment of IPCs 9F, 9I, 9N, 9P or 9R.

  65. Batch Type 98 - Lost Case Suspense - SSNs where the physical case file cannot be located are systemically assigned to BT 98, when IPC "LC" is input by a TE or clerk.

Requesting Batches
  1. The unit manager is responsible for monitoring the workload and determining the need to request additional work for their Unit.

  2. To request a batch:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Batch from the Control menu.

    4. Select Status/location from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Status/location from the pull right menu. The Update Batch Status/Location window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Enter the batch number.

      Note:

      Use <F6> to list all batches in "AB" status and the scroll bar to locate a batch. Select the batch by highlighting the batch number and press <Enter> or double click on the batch number.

      Caution:

      Response batches are not listed in IRS received date order.

    7. Press <Enter>. The cursor moves to the NEW STATUS field.

    8. Enter "AU" in the NEW STATUS field.

    9. Press <Enter>.

    10. Press <F4> to commit.

      Note:

      A work unit listing report will generate in a separate window after committing. Click OK in the pop-up Forms window to proceed. Print as needed or close the window to cancel.

    11. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. All batches in "AB" status display in descending order.

  4. Virtual screening batches display a "V" to the right of the batch number.

  5. Response batches display a "Y" when the original cases were virtual cases or an "N" if the original cases were paper.

Canceling Batches
  1. Batches in "AU" status can be canceled. This can be done even if some of the cases have been worked. Any work units not completed need to be reworked when the batch is reassigned.

    Caution:

    To avoid reworking cases, every effort should be made to complete started work units prior to canceling the batch.

  2. To cancel a batch:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Batch from the Control menu.

    4. Select Status/location from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Status location from the pull right menu. The Update Batch Status/Location window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Enter the batch number in the BATCH field. The current status and location displays. The cursor moves to the NEW STATUS field.

    7. Enter "CB" in the NEW STATUS field.

    8. Press <Enter>.

      Note:

      For tax year 2021 the Digitized Batch window will generate. Select "Yes" to maintain the virtual indicator on scanned and TDC RLS batches.

    9. Press <F4> to commit.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. Canceling a batch automatically updates the location to "RLS" .

Releasing Batches
  1. When a batch of work has been completed it needs to be updated to batch status "BF" .

  2. To release a batch from the unit:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Batch from the Control menu.

    4. Select Status/location from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Status/location from the pull right menu. The Update Batch Status/Location window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Enter the batch number in the BATCH field. The current status and location displays. The cursor moves to the NEW STATUS field.

    7. Enter "BF" in the NEW STATUS field. The system displays the following message: "CHECKING CASES IN BATCH" . See (3) and (4) below.

    8. Press <Enter>.

      Note:

      For tax year 2021 the Digitized Batch window will generate. Select "Yes" to maintain the virtual indicator on scanned and TDC RLS batches.

    9. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

      Note:

      Before Manual Interest batches (BT 61) can be updated to "BF" status, the system checks to see if the designated notice date has passed. If the date to generate the notice has passed, the cases need to be reworked.

  3. After entering "BF" Status Code, the system checks to see if any of the following conditions apply:

    1. TE has not released a work unit or case.

    2. No PC has been assigned since the batch was assigned to the unit.

    3. A defect code indicator remains on the case.

    4. A new transaction has posted to the tax account.

    5. A new payer agent has posted.

    6. A case in the batch has been requested by another user.

    7. Correspondence from the taxpayer has posted.

    8. An "Over $100,000" tax increase indicator.

    9. A Special Paragraph is present on the CP 2501 or CP 2000 notice.

    10. An Open Paragraph is present on a Correspondex letter.

    11. Action required due to Universal access.

    Note:

    The cases can be transferred to unit suspense for correcting, except for cases in BT 58.

  4. If cases meet any of the above criteria, the SSN of each one displays with an indicator (asterisk) in the appropriate column on the Cases in Error screen. To obtain a hard copy of the information, the Cases in Error listing may be printed. To access and print the Cases in Error Report see IRM 1.4.19.9.3, Cases in Error Report, and IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings. For a list of error conditions and the action required to correct each one, see Exhibit 1.4.19-4, Error Condition-Cause-Corrective Action Chart.

  5. Special Paragraphs need to be reviewed by the manager or lead. To review notice paragraphs, the manager can either click on the asterisk in the Cases in Error screen or take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Manager from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Review from the pull right menu. The Case Analysis screen displays with the cursor in the PRIMARY SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed. The case information displays.

    6. Select reF tools from the Case Analysis menu.

    7. Select nOtice para from the drop-down menu. The Select Notice Paragraph window displays.

    8. Click on 999 in the THIS BOX TO ENTER OR VIEW SPECIAL PARAGRAPH field. The Special Paragraph Txt window displays.

    9. Review the Special Paragraph and make any necessary changes.

    10. Click on Spellcheck.

    11. Press OK or <F8> to exit. The Select Notice Paragraph window displays.

    12. Press <F8> to exit. The Forms window will display Do you want to save the changes you have made? Select response accordingly. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message. The Case Analysis screen displays.

    13. Press <F7> to clear the screen.

  6. To review Open Paragraphs on a letter take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Manager from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Review from the pull right menu. The Case Analysis screen displays with the cursor in the PRIMARY SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed. The case information displays.

    6. Select reF tools from the Case Analysis menu.

    7. Select Letter from the drop-down menu. The Create Correspondex Letter screen displays. A "Y" displays next to the letter being sent.

    8. Click on the "Y" .

    9. Click on Display.

    10. Review the Open Paragraph.

    11. Click on OK.

    12. Press <F8> three times to exit.

    13. If the Open Paragraph needs to be corrected, assign/transfer the case back to the TE for correction.

  7. The Bypass Letter option is available on the Cases in Error screen. Follow campus direction for this option. To bypass letter paragraphs, click in the LETTER BYPASS field and press <F8> to exit.

    Caution:

    By using the Bypass Letter option you are releasing work without reviewing Open Paragraphs for errors in grammar and spelling or for content.

Work Units - General

  1. Batches, with the exception of suspense batches, are divided into work units. The number and volume of work units is set by the AUR Coordinator.

Assigning Work Units
  1. Before analyzing cases within a specific work unit, the work unit must be assigned to a Standard Employee Identifier (SEID).

  2. To assign a work unit the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select Assign from the drop-down menu. The Assign Work Unit window displays, with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    5. Enter the batch number. The cursor moves to the WORK UNIT field.

    6. Enter the two-digit work unit number. The cursor moves to the ACCEPT field.

    7. Enter "Y" to accept the work unit. The SSNs of the work unit display in the SSN fields.

    8. Verify these SSNs are part of the work unit.

      Note:

      It is not necessary to verify SSNs on virtual batches.

    9. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

Reassigning Work Units
  1. Sometimes it is necessary to change the assigned SEID of a work unit to another user. When a work unit is reassigned, it updates only unworked cases in a work unit. This option should be used to reassign a work unit when the assigned user is unable to complete the work unit.

    Note:

    Reassigning work units from one SEID to another does not change the batch assignment of the work unit.

  2. To reassign a specific work unit:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select Uid update from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Ssn from the pull right menu. The Update Work Unit UID window displays, with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Enter the batch number. The cursor moves to the WORK UNIT field.

    7. Enter the two-digit work unit number.

    8. Enter the new SEID. If any case in the work unit is being worked by another user (displayed on their terminal), the system generates an error message: "Case is being worked by (user SEID)" . Have the user clear the case from their screen. Reenter the batch number. The cursor moves to the CURRENT SEID field.

      Note:

      If some of the cases in the work unit have been worked (PC is on the system), an error message displays. A SEID must be assigned to partially completed work units. When the work unit is completed, it is released to the original batch.

    9. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    10. Press <F8> to exit. All the cases in the work unit are either returned to the batch or reassigned to the new SEID. Cases with a PC entered on the system retain the original TE’s SEID on the AUR history, unless the case is reworked.

  3. To reassign all work units for a specific SEID :

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select Uid update from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Uid from the pull right menu. The Update All SEID window displays, with the cursor in the CURRENT SEID field.

    6. Enter the current user SEID. All work units assigned to the current SEID display.

    7. Enter the new (reassigned) SEID in the NEW SEID field.

    8. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    9. Press <F8> to exit.

    Note:

    Using the SEID Update assigns all unworked cases to a new SEID: even those cases assigned to the TEs individual unit suspense.

Transferring Work Units
  1. Based on the assigned profile the Transfer Work Unit option may or may not be available.

  2. When a work unit is transferred, to another TE or another manager, the system moves all the cases in the work unit from the original batch to unit suspense. The cases are no longer part of the batch and cannot be returned to their original batch or within a work unit and must be released individually. Use this option to transfer a work unit from the batch when the batch needs to be released and the work unit is not complete.

    Note:

    Each case from the work unit has to be accepted individually. If the transferred work unit needs to be updated again, each case has to be updated individually. Transferred work units must have the PC on each case updated before release.

  3. To transfer a work unit:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Transfer from the pull right menu. The Transfer Work Unit window displays, with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Enter the batch number. The cursor moves to the WORK UNIT field.

    7. Enter the two-digit work unit number. The cursor moves to the TO UID NUMBER field.

    8. Enter the new SEID.

    9. Press <F4> to commit.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

Releasing Work Units
  1. A work unit must be released when all the cases in the work unit are complete.

  2. To release a work unit the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select Release from the drop-down menu. The Release Work Unit window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    5. Enter the batch number of the work unit to be released. The cursor moves to the WORK UNIT field.

    6. Enter the two-digit work unit number. As these cases are released, the system performs validity checks for each SSN (case) in the work unit.

      The system checks to verify all cases in the work unit have been completed with a PC and there are no cases where:
      the case has not been completed with a PC,
      there are New Transactions on tax account screen
      there is new Payer Agent information
      there is New Correspondence.

      Note:

      If there is a discrepancy, the Cases in Error window overlays the Release Work Unit window, showing the SSN(s) of the cases in error. The work unit cannot be released until all error conditions are corrected. See Exhibit 1.4.19-4, Error Condition-Cause-Corrective Action Chart, for error conditions and the action required to correct each one.

    7. If there are no cases in error, or when all error conditions have been corrected, the cursor moves to the RELEASE field. Enter "Y" in the RELEASE field.

    8. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    9. Press <F8> to exit. When the release of a work unit is complete, the SEID is removed, indicating no ownership.

    Note:

    During the response phase, if research is requested on a case(s) using IPC 3A, 6A, or 8A, the Unit Research Suspense window overlays the Release Work Unit window. These cases are systemically assigned to the Unit Suspense batch and must be physically removed from the work unit.

Cases

  1. Sometimes it is necessary to assign, reassign, transfer and release individual cases.

Assigning Cases
  1. The Assign option is used to assign individual cases to your SEID. Cases must be assigned to a SEID before any changes can be made. Examples of when this option might be used are to:

    • correct an error

    • rework a case released either individually or in a work unit

  2. To assign a case the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Assign from the drop-down menu. The Assign Case window displays, with the cursor in the SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be assigned.

    6. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

Releasing Cases
  1. The Release Case option is used to release a case from an individual's suspense.

  2. To release a case the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Release from the drop-down menu. The Release Case window displays, with the cursor in the SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be released.

      The system checks to verify certain conditions:
      The case has not been completed with a PC
      There are New Transactions on tax account screen,
      There is new Payer Agent information, or
      There is New Correspondence

      Note:

      If the system identifies a discrepancy, the Error window overlays the Release Case window (an asterisk (*) displays in the error condition column). The case can not be released until all error conditions are resolved. See Exhibit 1.4.19-4, Error Condition-Cause-Corrective Action Chart, for a complete list of error conditions and the action required to correct each one.

    6. If the case being released belongs to a batch assigned to the unit it should be returned to the batch in CSN order. If the batch displayed is a Unit Suspense batch type, the work unit and sequence number is blank. After releasing a case in unit suspense, place the case in the designated area for clerical retrieval.

    7. If there are no errors on the case, or when all error conditions have been corrected, press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

Releasing Cases through Universal Work
  1. The Release Case option is also used to release a Universal Work Case (UWC) assigned to a user.

  2. To release a universal case the TE must:

    Note:

    These cases do not appear on the unit inventory report, TEs need to use <F6> or access "cases assigned" to identify cases assigned to them under Universal work. Managers should monitor the employees inventory to ensure cases worked through UWC (BT XX950) are released timely.

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Release from the drop-down menu. The Release Case window displays, with the cursor in the SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be released. The system checks to verify certain conditions.

      The case status is displayed if:
      the case has not been completed with a PC
      there are New Transactions on tax account screen,
      there is new Payer Agent information
      there is New Correspondence

      Note:

      If the system identifies a discrepancy, the Error window overlays the Release Case window (an asterisk (*) displays in the error condition column). The case can’t be released until all error conditions are resolved. See Exhibit 1.4.19-4, Error Condition-Cause-Corrective Action Chart, for a complete list of error conditions and the action required to correct each one.

    6. If there are no errors on the case, or when all error conditions have been corrected, press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. There are times when TEs forget to release cases belonging to another site (UWC). The AUR Coordinator at the originating site contacts the AUR Coordinator of the site where the case is assigned through UWC and provides an SSN. If available, notify the TE to release the case. If the TE is not available see (4) below.

  4. The AUR Coordinator has the ability to release UWC cases a TE has worked and forgotten to release. To release a case the Coordinator should take the following action:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Transfer from the pull right menu. The Transfer Case window displays, with the cursor in the SSN field.

    6. Enter the SSN provided by the parent site. The following message appears "WARNING: WHEN YOU COMMIT, THIS UNIVERSAL WORK CASE WILL BE REFILED TO THE ORIGINAL BATCH AND LOCATION" , acknowledge the message.

    7. Press <F4> to commit.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

    Caution:

    When the AUR Coordinator releases the case it is refiled to the previous suspense batch. All PC's entered by the TE are lost.

Transferring Cases to Unit Suspense
  1. It may be necessary to transfer a case to the unit suspense batch, such as while waiting for assistance on the case or when another user needs to work a case. The manager may also need to transfer cases to other users.

  2. To transfer a case the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Transfer from the pull right menu. The Transfer Case window displays, with the cursor in the SSN field.

    6. Enter the SSN of case that needs to be transferred.

    7. Enter the SEID to which the case is to be transferred.

    8. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    9. Press <F8> to exit.

Updating Transferred Cases
  1. Based on the assigned profile the Update Transfers option may or may not be available. When using the Update Transfers function, the case must be in transfer status (for example, the case has been transferred but not accepted by the new user).

  2. To update a case transfer:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Update from the pull right menu. The Update Transfers window displays with the cursor in the SSN TO UPDATE field.

    6. Enter the SSN of the case to be updated. The cursor moves to the NEW UID field.

    7. Enter the new SEID.

    8. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    9. Press <F8> to exit.

      Note:

      When in the Update Transfers window, multiple SSNs can be updated without exiting the screen by repeating steps 5 and 6 above.

Requesting Cases
  1. In certain situations it may be necessary to request an individual case to work. The request case option generates a charge-out which the clerical function uses to pull, transfer, and route the case to the requester.

    Note:

    This option should not be used when working virtual cases, the TEs should use the UWC option whenever possible.

  2. To request a case:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select reQuest case from the drop-down menu.

    5. Enter the SSN. The Request Case window displays with a "W" in the REQUEST CD field, press <Enter>.

      Note:

      The system displays a message if the case is not in a Suspense Batch.

    6. A "Y" displays in the TELEPHONE field.

      Caution:

      Verify the "Y" is only in the telephone field and NOT in the PRP/CNGR field unless applicable.

    7. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

Requesting Cases through Universal Work
  1. When a TE is on the phone with a taxpayer, cases in major suspense batches (BTs 40, 47, 50, 55, 60, 70, and 93) can be requested to work through View case.

    1. The system displays the following error message if the case can’t be requested using Universal Work: "Case is not in a batch allowed for universal work case."

    2. If TE is unable to request a case using Universal work, see IRM 1.4.19.11.8.1.1, Adding/Reactivating Users.

  2. To request and work a case through UWC the TE must be in the View Case Screen:

    1. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    2. Select Case from the drop-down menu.

    3. Select univ Work from the pull right menu.

    4. Click on the YES box when the following message displays: "Do you accept the case to work?" .

    5. Acknowledge the message: "Warning: Case has been assigned to you. Please work case and release."

  3. Once a case has been released through UWC and additional changes need to be made and the case belongs to another site, TEs should not request clerical to transfer the case. Use the action required box to notify the originating site a correction needs to be made.

Accepting Transferred Cases
  1. A case transferred to a user must be accepted before it can be worked. Before accepting a case transfer, the paper case should be in the user's possession.

  2. To accept a case transfer the TE must:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Accept from the pull right menu. The Accept Transfers window displays showing individual cases transferred to your SEID. The cursor is in the ACCEPT field.

      Note:

      The Accept Transfers window is the same for accepting work units and individual cases.

    6. Enter "Y" in the ACCEPT column for each case being accepted.

    7. After entering "Y" for all the cases you choose to accept, press <F4> to commit.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

Viewing Cases
  1. Each user can be given a profile, which allows them to view any case on the system. For any year available on the AUR system, a user can view cases (Universal View Case (UVC)) in any of the seven AUR sites. The view case function is necessary for users who answer taxpayer telephone inquiries and for Notice reviewers.

    • The status bar on the Case Analysis screen displays the site where the case is located. The status bar indicates the user is in View Case.

    • If TE is unable to view a case using UVC, see IRM 1.4.19.11.8.1.1, Adding/Reactivating Users.

  2. When a case is accessed as a View Only Case, only the following changes will be saved on the case:

    1. Telephone number and contact hours on the Tax Account screen.

    2. Case notes on the Case Note screen.

    3. IR notes on the IR Note screen.

    4. All update fields on the Taxpayer Information window.

    5. Action required box.

    6. Update Address window.

  3. To view a case:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select View case from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request Case window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    4. Enter the SSN of the case to be viewed.

    5. Enter a "Y" in the Phone Contact box if applicable. When a "Y" is entered the Disclosure Verification Screen appears, see IRM 4.19.3.22.2.2.1, Disclosure Verification Screen, for additional information. If a "Y" is not entered or the Disclosure Verification Screen is completed, the case to be viewed displays.

    6. Press <F8> to exit.

Reassigning Cases
  1. Based on the assigned profile, the SEID update option may or may not be available. The Case SEID Update option is used to reassign a single case to another user. This option is used when an employee is not available to work a case assigned to them or to transfer it to another user.

  2. To reassign a case:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Uid update from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Case UID from the pull right menu. The Update Case UID window displays with the cursor in the SSN field.

    6. Enter the SSN of the case being reassigned. The cursor moves to the NEW UID field.

    7. Enter the SEID of the TE to work the case.

    8. Press <F4> to commit. A message displays indicating the records have been committed. Acknowledge the message.

    9. Press <F8> to exit.

Restoring Work Units
  1. When it is determined cases have too many errors after a review, the Restore Work Unit option can be used to refresh the data to near original data (before the TE made entries). Return value fields where changes to the original Return Transaction File (RTF) data were made cannot be restored. Caution TEs to recheck these entries for validity. The case must be reworked and the appropriate PC, other than RF, assigned. This option can only be used in the screening phase of Underreporter prior to the batch being updated to "RB" status. The AUR Coordinator and managers have access to restore options.

    Caution:

    The Restore Work Unit options should ONLY be used when all other actions have been taken to resolve the error(s).

  2. To restore a work unit:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Work unit from the Control menu.

    4. Select reStore from the drop-down menu. The Restore Work Unit window displays.

    5. Enter the batch number and work unit number to be restored.

    6. Press <F4> to commit. Cases cannot be accessed during the restore process. A message displays indicating all cases in the work unit have been restored.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

Telephones - Toll Free

  1. Each AUR site is responsible for providing successful toll-free service to our taxpayers. This subsection contains information and instructions for AUR managers to resolve taxpayer telephone inquiries through the UCCE (Unified Contact Center Environment) Telephone System. This includes security measures, accessing the system and training telephone assistors.

  2. Universal Work allows the TE to provide quality service to the taxpayer regardless of which site controls their case. This option is available for any year available on the AUR system. If the case requires a paper document or a fax, and is controlled at another campus, do not use the Universal Work Option. See IRM 4.19.3.22.2.6, Universal Case.

    Note:

    If TE is unable to view or request a case using UWC, see IRM 1.4.19.11.8.1.1, Adding/Reactivating Users.

Aceyus - Real Time Reporting

  1. Aceyus is the key element in the AUR telephone unit's work environment. Aceyus provides access to the Unified Contact Center Environment (UCCE) telephone data. Aceyus is utilized by the Telephone Systems Analyst (TSA) and managers to monitor their employees' status on the UCCE telephone system. Aceyus provides/displays team, site, and Enterprise level of information on the telephone traffic, ready agents, level of service (LOS), abandoned calls and VCR busy.

    Note:

    Users needing access to Aceyus must submit a Business Entitlement Access Request System (BEARS) request.

  2. Aceyus is used to view real time and historical employee data for employee reviews, monitoring phone adherence, and other items as applicable.

Bringing Up the Phone System

  1. Each manager ensures all employees scheduled for telephone duty are signed into the UCCE systems and their name is displayed on Aceyus. This allows the manager to see the current phone status of each employee.

  2. Review the screens for all of the following:

    1. Assistors signed-on the system from the day before who may have forgotten to sign-off.

    2. Assistors are signed-on and ready to take calls when the phone lines are opened.

    3. If applicable, English/Spanish assistors are available to cover calls.

    4. Assistors are signed-on to the correct agent group, if applicable.

    5. Assistors are using the appropriate idle code and time for lunch, break, temp -off, phone inventory, hold wrap, training, meeting and read time, if applicable.

    6. Monitor the length of time an assistor spends on a call.

End of Day/Shift Activities

  1. End of day activities involve reviewing the Aceyus screens for the following:

    1. Assistors in wrap or idle who should be signed off the system.

    2. Assistor reports showing available, wrap, idle, break and other information.

      Note:

      SB/SE call site complete Automated Time Tracking System (ATTS) 3081 at the end of each day. ATTS is a tool designed to consolidate telephone data from UCCE and produce a time report which is used for Single Entry Time Reporting (SETR) input.

  2. An end of shift review of UCCE system concerns and problems should be completed. These should be shared with the manager(s) responsible for the next phone shift/rotation. This allows for a review of assistors signing-on for the next shift at the start of their Tour of Duty (TOD) to help take calls when in the phone rotation.

Call Demand Forecast

  1. Schedules help ensure adequate telephone coverage. Using the following factors, Joint Operations Center (JOC) develops the schedules and provides them to each site one week in advance:

    • Forecasting: The first step used to build a schedule, based on mail outs and response rates. JOC looks at historical data, trends and assumptions.

    • Enterprise schedule: When building the Enterprise Schedule, JOC looks at the intraweek and intraday call patterns, productivity rates and the Level of Service (LOS).

    • Site Schedule: Determines how the enterprise schedule is apportioned to each site. Determining factors include hours of operation, work plan hours and available resources.

Scheduling for Call Demand
  1. JOC sends the schedule to each Telephone Systems Analyst (TSA) one week in advance. The TSA or the designated back up provides each unit manager with the hours needed to ensure the scheduled telephone time for assistors meets the call demand expected for each day. Telephone coverage is usually scheduled for each half hour of the day. The following information should be considered when scheduling the hours for your team.

    • Pre-scheduled leave requests

    • Subsequent leave requests

    • Leave exchanges

    • Training schedules

    • Team meeting schedules

    • Special "time off phone" requests

    • TODs of phone assistors, including break/lunch schedules

    Caution:

    When possible, avoid assigning assistors right up to the end of their TOD or immediately before and after their break/lunch periods.

  2. Consider scheduling assistors in a half-day rotation. In this case, one group would cover the first part of the shift and another group the second part of the shift.

  3. No matter what method you use to schedule the call demand, adjustments need to be made during the day. The TSA or back-up notifies the managers if the hours need to be adjusted.

Scheduling Staff
  1. The phone schedule should be finalized prior to the period it covers. Managers should ensure the information given to the TSA is current. When short notice emergencies arise the TSA must be notified immediately.

  2. Ensure any upcoming events have been given to the TSA or back up as soon as possible prior to the scheduling period. These items include:

    1. Pre-scheduled leave requests

    2. New leave requests

    3. Training schedules

    4. Team meeting schedules

    5. Town Hall and Focus group meetings

    6. Special "time off phone" requests

    7. Employee rewards of time off the phones

    8. Detailed employees

    9. Employees who have resigned, retired or been reassigned

    10. Employees who are not available for the phones due to special project work

    11. Changes in TOD's of assistors

  3. In addition to the items listed in (1) above the TSA or designated back up should consider break/lunch schedules when scheduling the phone assignments.

Events Impacting Staffing
  1. Many events impact the phone schedules. Managers must consistently watch for and react to these events.

  2. Requests for subsequent leave are handled according to any local agreement in your campus.

  3. Requests for emergency leave are allowed as any other emergency leave.

  4. When an assistor is not available for scheduled phone duty and a replacement is needed:

    1. If time allows, have the assistor find a replacement for their scheduled phone time, and report back with the name of the replacement.

    2. If there is not enough time for the assistor to find a replacement, assign an assistor to cover the absent employee’s schedule.

  5. If a team is unable to meet adherence, immediately send an email to other teams requesting assistance prior to notifying the TSA. If unable to get assistance, notify the TSA of the reason for not meeting adherence and when the team is expected to return to schedule as published.

  6. If emergency training is necessary, coordinate with another phone unit to exchange phone time or divide the team to have only those scheduled for phones attend a duplicate training at another time.

  7. Team meetings should be coordinated with the TSA so another phone unit can be scheduled to cover the phones.

  8. When Town Hall meetings are scheduled:

    1. The TSA notifies JOC in advance so the calls can be routed elsewhere.

    2. Have all assistors log off the UCCE Phones and attend the meeting.

Adherence to Schedule

  1. Whether the TSA or someone else sets up the phone schedule, managers must monitor their team by using Aceyus frequently throughout the day. When looking at Aceyus ensure your phone assistors are signed on or off as scheduled, taking calls and following break/lunch schedule.

  2. When it is necessary for an assistor to be off the phone the TSA must be notified and given the length of time the assistor is expected to be off the phones. Assistors must use the proper idle codes. IDLE codes are:

    Idle Code Meaning
    1 Temporarily off the phone (town hall and focus group meetings, NTEU, bathroom, nurse, reviews)
    2 Phone inventory (first available)
    3 Phone inventory (second available)
    4 Training
    5 Read time
    6 Team meeting time
    7 Break time
    8 Lunch time
    9 Stress break - must be approved by the manager

  3. When it is necessary to request additional help from assistor(s), the TSA informs the managers. The manager should let the assistor know exactly how long their help on the phones is needed. This can be accomplished by:

    1. Specifying an amount of time, such as 20 minutes, or

    2. Specifying the number of calls to take, such as 5 calls.

  4. Assistors should be added/removed based on the following criteria:

    1. The amount of time they are assigned to phones for the week (for example, try to even out the amount of phone time per assistor).

    2. Whether it is close to their scheduled lunch/break period.

    3. Whether the assistors’ average call length facilitates the current need (for example, are they able to complete calls quickly enough to accomplish the goal).

  5. If an Assistor is in available for an excessive amount of time, and isn’t receiving any calls although other assistors are receiving calls, the assistor may not be signed-on correctly or there may be systemic issues. Verify the assistor is signed onto UCCE. If not, have the assistor log-off and log back on with the correct number. If the assistor is logged on UCCE, notify the TSA. The TSA will advise you of the proper action to take.

  6. If the Aceyus report is unavailable:

    1. Call the TSA to report the Aceyus problem.

    2. Follow the phone schedule explicitly until the Canvas comes up again.

  7. Telephone assistors are expected to handle AUR actions on the account while the taxpayer is on the phone. Telephone actions should be taken in "talk" or "Hold" status. Wrap time is appropriate when the:

    • Caller does not wish to stay on the line,

    • Case is complex requiring significant time to complete documentation or research, or

    • Taxpayer is abusive or is using inappropriate language and the phone assistor has to end the call.

    Note:

    Be aware of assistors in wrap or idle for extended periods of time. This may indicate the assistor failed to log off the UCCE system when leaving their desk for an extended period of time. Muting a call is not appropriate when research is being conducted; the caller should be placed on hold.

Manager Calls

  1. Manager calls should be very rare. If an assistor refers an excessive number of calls, it is likely additional training and coaching is needed in "Effective Communication" and/or "Dealing with Difficult Taxpayers" .

  2. Remember everyone in IRS is an advocate for the taxpayer. Appropriate actions should be taken to correct the taxpayer’s problem on first contact. However, if you cannot correct the problem AND the taxpayer’s issue meets Taxpayer Advocate Service (TAS) criteria as outlined in IRM 21.1.3.18, Taxpayer Advocate Service (TAS) Guidelines, refer the case to the TAS.

  3. Encourage assistors to practice techniques to diffuse a taxpayer's anger, reassure taxpayers they can assist with the issue, and to make every effort to handle the call themselves. However, some taxpayers:

    • Immediately want to speak with a manager,

    • Are only satisfied by speaking with a manager even though the assistor has provided the requested assistance,

    • Want to complain about the service the IRS has provided, or

    • Want to compliment the service the IRS has provided.

Manager Calls - Taking a Call
  1. In order to receive a manager call, ensure you are signed onto the Cisco Finesse Supervisor desktop software. For log in information, See the Cisco Finesse Supervisor Desktop User Guide.

  2. When you are prepared to speak with the taxpayer, take the referred call:

    1. Verify from the phone assistor disclosure was covered. If disclosure was not addressed, it’s the manager’s responsibility to cover disclosure procedures.

    2. Obtain the SSN and the tax year from the assistor and ensure the assistor is no longer viewing the case.

    3. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    4. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    5. Select View case from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

      Caution:

      Do not click on the PHONE CONTACT field, when the assistor has already taken this action.

    6. Connect with the taxpayer and provide your name (for example, Manager LAST name” or Mr, Mrs, Miss, Ms LAST name), unique badge identification number and ask "How may I help you?" .

      Caution:

      DO NOT provide your first and last name when identifying yourself, use one of the examples shown above.

  3. While talking with taxpayers, you represent the IRS and must always conduct yourself in a professional manner. There is no excuse for treating anyone rudely. Be courteous, control the direction of the conversation and give the taxpayer accurate and complete assistance.

    1. Maintain a pleasant, friendly tone of voice.

    2. Speak clearly, using words the taxpayer can understand.

    3. Avoid using IRS jargon and acronyms.

    4. Handle taxpayer’s negative reactions with patience.

    5. Treat the taxpayer as a unique individual deserving respect.

    6. Put yourself in the taxpayer’s place. If you received a notice and called for assistance, you would want to be treated with respect and given accurate, complete information to resolve the problem.

  4. Callbacks are used when you prefer to return the call at a later time, enabling you to research the account before talking to the taxpayer. If you prefer to return the taxpayer's call, obtain the taxpayer's name, SSN, phone number and the best time to return the call. For more information on making an outgoing call, see the Cisco Finesse Supervisor Desktop User Guide.

  5. Double jacking enables the manager to take the call along side the assistor. Using this procedure might provide some insight on how this type of call could be handled by the assistor in the future.

    Reminder:

    Place yourself in IDLE or Logout of the Cisco Finesse Supervisor desktop when you are away from your desk.

Distressed/Angry Customers
  1. When a call is transferred to the manager, the taxpayer is already distressed. Be prepared to take the appropriate action to deal with their needs. An important goal in dealing with a distressed taxpayer is to keep potentially disruptive emotions out of the conversation. Start with controlling your own reactions and emotions.

    Reminder:

    Even though the taxpayer is distressed, they want to believe as a manager, you can make the situation better.

  2. There are three steps to lessen a taxpayer's anger:

    1. Listen.

    2. Empathize.

    3. Assure.

Telephone Threat Procedures
  1. When a phone assistor clicks on the "Emergency" button, the manager will be notified. The call will automatically become a conference call to include the phone assistor, caller, and the Emergency Call Recording line.

  2. The following instructions should be used when receiving a bomb or other threatening call:

    1. The assistor gets the manager's attention. Managers should be available to walk the assistor through the procedures.

    2. The assistor needs to be as calm as possible, following the instructions below and asking the questions as shown on Form 9166, Bomb Threat Data Collection.

    3. Keep the caller on the line as long as possible. Ask them to repeat the message. Ask the questions listed on Form 9166.

    4. Complete the Form 9166. Retain a copy for your records and forward a copy to Treasury Inspector General for Tax Administration (TIGTA).

    5. If the caller does not indicate the location or time of possible detonation, ask them for this information. Since calls are routed between different sites, it is extremely important to try to ascertain the caller's physical location and which IRS facility (city, state, specific building/floor/function) is being threatened.

    6. Inform the caller the building is occupied and detonation of a bomb could result in the death or serious injury to many innocent people.

    7. Listen closely to the voice (male or female), voice quality (calm, excited), accents, and speech impediments.

    8. Pay particular attention to background noises such as motors running, music playing, and any other noise which might give a clue to the caller's location.

    9. DO NOT hang-up after the caller is off the line. This assists in tracing the call.

  3. Immediately report a bomb threat to your nearest TIGTA office. If the bomb threat concerns another IRS building, the TIGTA agent(s) contact the TIGTA office having jurisdiction over the threatened IRS building. Enter the telephone numbers for contacting your TIGTA Office below:

    • During Work Hours: ____________________

    • After Hours: ___________________________

    More related information can be found at http://.irsgov/sharepoint.com/sites/EmployeeResources/SitePages/Emergency-&-Safety.aspx. and see IRM 21.1.3.10.7, Bomb Threats.

    Note:

    It may be helpful to keep a Form 9166 with the above information readily available at your workstation.

Suicide Threats
  1. If a taxpayer makes a suicide threat over the telephone, the assistor should:

    1. Press the Emergency button located in the Finesse Agent Desktop software.

    2. Stay calm.

    3. Not hang up or ignore the caller.

    4. Use good judgment in keeping the caller on the line.

    5. Immediately get a manager or the acting manager to take the call - without transferring or putting the caller on hold.

  2. The manager/acting manager:

    1. Takes responsibility for the telephone call.

    2. Asks the caller for the location (including phone number) from which they are calling.

    3. If the caller complies, document the caller's address/location.

    4. Use all means available at your site, including the telephone or internet access to gather the necessary information to contact the required local law enforcement or government suicide prevention authority.

      Note:

      Campus directions vary, ensure all managers have the appropriate instruction inserted here. All sites should cover this information with local management to ensure during a live call of this type, it is not the first time the manager has reviewed these instructions.

      Note:

      If either the assistor and/or manager is teleworking, see IRM 21.1.3.12.1, Suicide Threat Procedures in a Telework Environment, for more information.

    5. Report the threat and the caller's location to the local authorities. When we obtain a telephone number or location from the caller, we can relay this information to the local authorities.

      Note:

      If the caller provides their location, this information can be given to local authorities. This is not a disclosure of return/account information. See IRM 11.3.34.2, Procedures for Release of Information Regarding a Nontax Crime, and IRM 11.3.34.3, Expedited Procedures in Emergency Situations, for more information.

    6. When reporting a suicide threat to local law enforcement authorities, state only that the threat was made during a contact involving "official business" .

    7. Before ending the call, try to resolve the tax problem and calm the caller.

    8. Contact your local Disclosure Manager as soon as possible and inform them of the threat and of any information disclosed to the law enforcement or suicide prevention authority. See IRM 11.3.34.2, Procedures for Release of Information Regarding a Nontax Crime, and IRM 11.3.34.3, Expedited Procedures in Emergency Situations, for more information.

    9. If the caller refuses to give their location, a manager/lead or TE (provided a local Disclosure delegation order granting authorization is in effect) can use IRS systems to obtain the name and address of the caller, in order to give the information to federal or state law enforcement agencies, in situations involving life and health of an individual. This is considered an authorized IRC Section 6103(i)(3)(B) disclosure. See IRM 11.3.28.8, Use of Returns and Return Information in Administrative and Judicial Proceedings, and IRM 21.1.3.12, Suicide Threats, for further information.

  3. Calls involving threats of suicide require all of the following actions be taken:

    • Contact your local Disclosure Office. Disclosure will guide you through the required accounting for the disclosure.

    • Contact the local TIGTA office following established local procedures.

    • Contact Employee Protection using Form 13090, Caution Indicator Referral Report, via fax, mail or a secured e-mail message. For additional information regarding Caution Upon Contact designation and referrals see IRM 25.4.2, Caution Upon Contact Taxpayer.

Compliments and Complaints
  1. Complimentary calls should be routed to a manager. Records of complimentary calls should be included in the employee’s annual appraisal under the appropriate critical element. Be sure to thank anyone who compliments the IRS.

  2. Taxpayer complaints about unresolved tax account issues should be resolved if possible. If unable to resolve and the issue meets Taxpayer Advocate Service (TAS) criteria, transfer to TAS. See IRM 21.1.3.18, Taxpayer Advocate Service (TAS) Guidelines.

  3. Taxpayer complaints about individual (IRS) employees are captured under the Section 1203 process. Managers consult with Workforce Relations and TIGTA to investigate the issue. See IRM 21.1.3.16, Taxpayer Complaints/Compliments About IRS Service.

    Note:

    Check for campus directions for handling taxpayer complaints and compliments.

Telephone Security

  1. The manager must request access for all new UCCE users to the UCCE System through BEARS, be sure all special instructions are included. Contact the TSA if assistance is needed with the special instructions. The manager notifies the TSA when a new BEARS has been created. The CCSD assigns a UCCE extension and uses BEARS to transmit the information, including password, to the user.

  2. The initial password will be the same for both the UCCE telephone and the desktop software. Passwords for the UCCE telephone expire every 90 days. CTIOS desktop software phones do not expire, but agents can contact their manager or TSA to change the password if needed.

  3. If a user forgets their desktop software password, Managers and TSAs have the ability to reset passwords

  4. If a user forgets their UCCE telephone password a KISAM ticket is required, please contact the TSA to open a ticket.

Telephone Call Reviews

  1. Managers are required to review 3 calls per month per assistor or the number of reviews as set forth locally by either the Department or Operations Manager.

  2. To review a live call see Cisco Finesse Supervisor Desktop User Guide, for more information.

    Note:

    Review information is entered into the Embedded Quality System (EQRS); however, a monitoring sheet is usually helpful in keeping a record of the call.

    Reminder:

    Managers must complete a BEARS, Automated Information System (AIS) User Registration/Change Request, to request a link to EQRS. Read the EQRS User Guide before proceeding to main menu for logon.

  3. Calls can also be reviewed using Contact Recording through the Verint System. To review a call using Contact Recording, managers and reviewers requiring access to Verint must complete a BEARS request with the appropriate special instructions.

  4. IRM 4.19.3.22.2, Telephone Responses, contains the requirements for assistors and should be referenced in call reviews.

  5. Share the review with the assistor within 3 workdays. However, if the assistor has provided incorrect information to the taxpayer, the manager informs the assistor as soon as possible but no later than eight (8) work hours after the call has been reviewed. Keep a signed copy of the review for your records.

Track Telephone Time Reporting

  1. Assistors should charge their time based on the criteria below:

    1. Time spent on UCCE either taking incoming calls from taxpayers or making outgoing calls as a result of the toll-free call should be charged to 700-48X40. Ensure the call back occurs on an UCCE phone in the appropriate Agent Group.

    2. Call backs on paper inventory should be charged to the appropriate "paper" ; 710 Organizational Function Program (OFP) (ie: CP 2501 response, CP 2000 response, Stat Notice Response or Reconsiderations).

    3. Calls involving identity theft should be recorded under 700-48043.

    4. Cases ordered while on telephone duty should be charged to the appropriate OFP for the status of the case.

  2. The TSA forwards the Daily Agent Performance by Team Number report, to the manager. This report is a managerial tool and should not be shared with assistors. Compare entries on timesheet (Form 3081) to the times shown on the report to ensure time is reported accurately.

    Note:

    If the Daily Agent Performance by Team Number report is unavailable, time sheet entries can be compared with the daily telephone schedule or the ATTS.

Telephone Reports and Monitoring

  1. User reports provide call activity statistics on a particular assistor or on all assistors signed on to the system. Several types of user reports may be requested through your TSA or through Aceyus and ETD.

    • ETD AHT Team Agent Application - displays total phone statistics for all assistors in a team or group of teams.

    • Aceyus Detail Agent Team Logon-Logout with Reason - displays assistors state throughout the day, when they signed on and off the phones and when no idle code state in a team or department grouping.

    • Aceyus Detail Agent Team 06 displays every instance of idle in half-hourly increments.

    • ETD Short Call report displays all assistors with calls below the 30 second threshold.

    • ETD Outcall report displays all outcalls made by an agent within specific teams.

    • ETD Excessive Reason Code report summarizes idle time in excess of 30 minutes by agent and team

  2. User reports may be used as a manager's tool when performing an assistor’s regular scheduled review.

ETD AHT Team Agent Application Report
  1. The ETD AHT Team Agent Application Report shows summary call activity for all assistors signed on to the system during the specified time period. The report lists assistors by applications and displays the following statistics for each group:

    1. UCCE Extension number - the UCCE extension number of each user. Users are listed under the Application they took calls in. An agent will be listed multiple times if they took calls in different applications.

    2. Calls - number of calls handled by each agent in a specific application.

    3. Total Talk Time - the total amount of time spent talking in HH:MM:SS in a specific application.

    4. Talk Time percent - the percentage of total time an agent spent talking in a specific application.

    5. Total Hold Time - the total amount of time spent in hold in HH:MM:SS in a specific application.

    6. Hold Time percent - the percentage of total time an agent spent on hold in a specific application.

    7. Total Wrap Time - the total amount of time spent in wrap in HH:MM:SS in a specific application.

    8. Wrap Time percent - the percentage of total time an agent spent in wrap in a specific application.

    9. Total Handle Time - the total amount of time and agent spent in talk + hold + wrap in HH:MM:SS in a specific application.

    10. AHT in Secs - the average handle time in seconds in a specific application. Average handle time is calculated by taking the total handle time and dividing by the number of calls.

    11. AHT in HMS - the average handle time in HH:MM:SS in a specific application.

    12. Available Duration - the total amount of time spent in Available waiting for a call to come in HH:MM:SS. Available time is allocated to the last application an agent answered.

    13. Phone Ready Duration - Total time an agent was in a work ready state in a specific application. Work ready states are talking, hold, wrap, and available.

Daily Availability/Shortage Log
  1. AUR telephone managers are required to adhere to the schedule forwarded by the TSA or designated person, on a daily basis. All changes to the schedule must be reported daily on the Availability/Shortage Log within 1 hour of the start of the manager's tour of duty. The report is formatted in half-hour increments, is a useful tool to schedule phone staffing and can be used to:

    1. Determine staffing on phones and to create a balance of the staff working the paper cases.

    2. Schedule coverage for breaks, lunch and unit meetings.

  2. The following items must be reported on the Daily Availability/Shortage Log:

    1. Shortages on phones for Spanish and Practitioner Priority Services (PPS) lines, if applicable.

    2. Changes to breaks, lunch, team meetings, read time, other meetings, training and special projects.

    3. When assistors are pulled off the phones for any reason.

Work Planning and Control Report (WP&C)
  1. The Work Planning and Control Report (WP&C), tracks hours and call volumes.

  2. Phone assistors record the time spent answering phone calls on a daily basis using ATTS.

  3. Using the Agent Reporting Summary Call report, the volume is entered into the BBTS system every Monday for the previous week.

    Note:

    The figures reported on the WP&C are compared to the actual time reported by JOC. Any difference is known as Slippage and is one of the Adherence factors. The difference between the time reported on the WP&C and the actual time should not be higher than 6.1 percent.

Troubleshooting UCCE System Problems

  1. Assistors taking UCCE telephone calls may occasionally encounter problems with the UCCE phone system. Most of these problems involve the phone lines or the phone equipment. Managers should instruct assistors to take the following actions if they have problems with the UCCE system.

  2. If the assistor reports being unable to transfer a call to another AUR site, the manager should follow campus directions to report the problem.

  3. If the assistor reports experiencing difficulty hearing the caller; have the assistor adjust the volume using the UP or DOWN volume buttons on the phone instrument, or adjust the volume using the volume control on the UCCE headset. If the problem isn’t resolved, the assistor should ask the caller for a phone number, offer to call him/her back, and then return the call from a different phone.

  4. If the assistor reports the caller is having difficulty hearing, have the assistor press the BAD LINE button on the CTIOS desktop. This does not resolve the problem, but it sends a report to the TSA and CCSD, who can monitor the situation. If the problem persists, have the assistor ask the caller for a phone number, offer to call him/her back, and then return the call from a different phone.

  5. If the assistor reports static on the line, have the assistor press the BAD LINE button on the CTIOS desktop. This does not resolve the problem, but it sends a report to the TSA and CCSD, who can monitor the situation. If the static prevents the caller and the assistor from holding an effective conversation, the assistor should ask the caller for a phone number, offer to call him/her back, and then return the call from a different phone.

  6. If the assistor reports the UCCE phone rings while the assistor is already talking on the phone, have the assistor press the BAD LINE button on the CTIOS desktop. This does not resolve the problem, but it sends a report to the TSA and CCSD, who can monitor the situation. If the problem persists, have the assistor ask the caller for a phone number, offer to call him/her back, and then return the call from a different phone.

  7. If the assistor reports talking with a caller and simultaneously hearing another conversation on the line, have the assistor press the BAD LINE button on the CTIOS desktop. This does not resolve the problem, but it sends a report to the TSA and CCSD, who can monitor the situation. If the problem persists, have the assistor ask the caller for a phone number, offer to call him/her back, and then return the call from a different phone. The manager should also inform the TSA about the situation.

  8. If the assistor reports there is no tone when they log onto the UCCE system, follow campus directions to resolve. If the problem isn’t corrected, move the assistor to another desk (if one is available) and contact the TSA.

  9. If the Aceyus RT Adherence Report is unavailable:

    1. Call the TSA to report the problem.

    2. Follow the phone schedule explicitly until the report comes up again.

  10. In addition to those problems mentioned above, other types of problems could involve LCD displays not working properly on the phone instrument (tele-set) or the headset not working properly. Assistors report these problems to the manager, who forwards the problem to the TSA.

  11. If a problem persists and the assistor is unable to work on the instrument, the manager should move the assistor to a different phone, if possible.

Troubleshooting General Problems
  1. When the UCCE phones go down take one or more of the following actions:

    1. Follow campus directions to notify the TSA the UCCE phones are down.

    2. Direct assistors to complete case actions while monitoring for the phones to come back up.

    3. Direct assistors to review pertinent sections of the IRM.

    4. Direct assistors to work on projects they may be involved in.

    5. Direct assistors to work paper cases.

  2. In the event of power outages:

    1. If the UCCE phones are still working, direct assistors to use Form 4442, Inquiry Referral, (or similar documentation) to take a message and return the call later if they are unable to answer a general question.

    2. If the UCCE phones are down, see (1) above.

  3. If AUR is unavailable:

    1. Direct assistors to use IDRS to answer as many calls as possible.

    2. If the assistor is unable to answer without the use of AUR, direct assistors to use Form 4442 (or similar documentation) and return the call later.

  4. If IDRS is unavailable:

    1. Direct assistors to use AUR to answer as many calls as possible.

    2. When the assistor is unable to answer without the use of IDRS, direct them to use Form 4442 (or similar documentation) and return the call later.

  5. In the event of Fire drills and other building evacuations:

    1. Instruct assistors to explain there is an emergency in the building. If the assistor already has a number, they should offer to return the call as soon as possible and then hang up. If the assistor does not have a number, they should request the caller try again later or another day.

    2. If necessary, release the call for the assistor and escort them out of the building. Ensuring the assistor treats the situation as a true emergency reinforces their behavior if a true emergency ever arises.

    3. When the emergency is over, adjust your phone schedule to allow for returning calls to those you cut short prior to the emergency. This may include doubling the number of assistors in order to allow for the outgoing calls. You may also ask assistors to return calls when not assigned to phone coverage.

      Reminder:

      This decreases the amount of work accomplished towards your paper goals.

  6. When equipment malfunctions or is broken:

    1. Follow campus directions to determine which part of the equipment is broken or malfunctioning.

    2. Contact the TSA for assistance.

Reporting Problems to the Telephone System Analyst (TSA)

  1. Managers should notify the TSA when problems have been identified. Some of the issues managers should address with the TSA are:

    • Phone tracking relating to available, idle, wrap, and break time

    • Agent group activities such as creating a team, inactivating an employee UCCE number, moving an assistor to another group, and creating special agent groups for disaster calls, English only, Spanish, or paper only

    • Phone shutdown

    • Aceyus problems

    • Phone equipment needs

    • UCCE troubleshooting

    • How to read reports generated by the TSA staff

    • Contact recording

  2. Managers need to maintain the TSA's contact information:

    • The TSA's name

    • The TSA's phone number, pager number, E-mail address

    • The same information listed above for the TSA's back-up, as applicable

  3. Depending on the type of problem being experienced, the TSA normally asks several questions. Have the following information ready:

    • The Cubicle number where the problem exists.

    • The assistor's UCCE extension (the Agent Number)

    • The time of day the problem occurred

    • How often the problem is occurring

Taxpayer Digital Communications (TDC) in AUR

  1. AUR tax examiners can communicate with certain taxpayers via secure messaging.

  2. All secure messages being sent through eGain require a Manager or Leads review to accept or reject the message before it is sent to the taxpayer/authorized representative. See the Secure Messaging Taxpayer Digital Communication Guide, on the AUR Research Portal IMF, for more information.

Procedures for Reviewing Outbound Messages

  1. Outbound messages to taxpayers/authorized representatives require managerial approval. When a TE creates a message, the system sends the message to the Lead’s inbox and places it in the Managerial Approval queue. When the Lead signs into eGain, the outbound messages requiring managerial approval displays in the inbox.

  2. The Manager or Lead must Accept or Reject the messages. Once the Manager or Lead accepts the message it is sent to the customer. If the message is rejected it’s sent back to the examiner for corrections.

  3. To Accept or Reject the message take the following actions:

    1. Go to the Inbox.

    2. Click on the message to review. The message appears in the Reply pane.

    3. Click on the ellipsis in the Reply pane.

    4. Select Save from the drop-down menu.

  4. Review the message for the following:

    • Check the Subject Line.

    • TP’s name is not in all capital letters in the greeting.

    • The outbound message has the correct attachments.

    • IRS Case status. If the message is a closing, ensure the IRS Case status is marked Completed.

  5. If the message is acceptable, click Accept. The message automatically goes through spellcheck and then out to taxpayer.

  6. If the message is unacceptable (i.e., spelling/grammar issues, incorrect information provided, etc.), send an encrypted email and ensure the subject line does not contain PII to the examiner, with the reason you are rejecting the message. Provide the SSN and Case ID of the message being rejected. Then select Reject, the message is sent to the tax examiner’s inbox for correction.

Manager Procedures for Reviewing Outbound Messages

  1. Messages are automatically populated into the Lead's inbox when the Lead signs into eGain. When the lead is not in, the manager must manually pick the messages from the Manager Approval Queue to review. Review of the messages themselves should follow the same process outlined in IRM 1.4.19.5.1, Procedures for Reviewing Outbound Messages.

  2. To manually pick the messages from the Manager Approval Queue:

    1. Click on the ellipsis in the Inbox pane. A drop-down menu displays.

    2. Select "Pick" from the drop-down menu. The Pick Activities Dialog Box displays.

    3. Select the Queue radio button, then click the downward triangle, a drop-down menu displays.

    4. Select Manager Approval Austin from the drop-down menu. The activities display in the Filter By Subject field.

    5. Highlight the activities you wish to select and click "Pick" in the lower right side of the Dialog box. The activities automatically populate in the inbox.

Transferring Cases

  1. There may be instances where cases need to be transferred either to another employee or back into the Secure Message Queue to be put back into the round robin assignment.

  2. If an employee needs to be added or removed from round robin new case assignment due to extended leave or other circumstances, contact AUR Policy no later than Wednesday with the employee’s name and SEID for the change to be effective starting the following week.

  3. If a case needs to be transferred from one employee to another take the following actions:

    1. Go to the Inbox.

    2. Highlight the message you want to transfer and click the ellipsis. A drop-down menu displays.

    3. Select Transfer from the drop-down menu. The Transfer Activities Dialog box displays.

      Note:

      Activities must be transferred one at a time.

    4. In the Transfer to, select User. A list of user’s displays.

    5. Highlight the user the case is being transferred to and click the Transfer button.

    6. Repeat the above steps for all activities for same Case ID that were picked.

    7. Inform the receiving employee so they can send out the message stating they are the new examiner. Sending this message makes the new examiner the "Sticky Agent", ensuring all new inbound messages go to the newest assigned TE.

      Caution:

      If the new examiner does not send the message, and the taxpayer sends another message, the new activity will go back to the previous examiner the case was reassigned from.

  4. Take the following actions if a case needs to be transferred back to the Round Robin Assignment queue:

    1. Go to the Inbox and click on the ellipsis, a drop-down menu displays.

    2. Select "Pick" from the drop-down menu. The Pick Activities Dialog Box displays.

    3. Select the User radio button and the SEID from the dropdown menu. The activities display in the Filter By Subject field.

    4. Sort the activities by Case ID to be sure to get all messages for same case. There is usually only one since this is used for transferring a new taxpayer back into the queue to be assigned round robin to the next examiner. The subject of the message is title "No Subject (nnnnn)" .

    5. Highlight the activity you wish to select and click "Pick" in the lower right side of the Dialog box. The activity automatically populates in the inbox.

  5. The unit Lead and Clerk have the permissions to change the case owner. But only the lead or the assigned examiner can transfer the case.

Compliance Manager's Reviews - General

  1. All Compliance managers are required to conduct the following (where applicable) reviews:

    • Telephone monitoring

    • Workload reviews and on-line reviews

    • IDRS reviews

    • Evaluative reviews

    • Non-evaluative reviews

    • Clerical reviews

  2. Reviews should focus on effective case resolution according to IRM guidelines. Emphasize the achievement of quality service.

  3. Headquarters, Directors, Operations and Department Managers set review requirements for their respective operations. Conduct a balance of these reviews throughout the year and include a variety of types of reviews. When necessary conduct side-by-side non-evaluative reviews for skill development.

Review of Form 3210 Acknowledgement

  1. Managers shall perform, at a minimum, quarterly audits of the Form 3210 Acknowledgement process for packages containing PII to ensure appropriate follow-up is occurring. This procedure will allow AUR managers the opportunity to validate that PII senders are following up on Form 3210 Acknowledgments within defined timeframes so that lost shipments are identified quickly. This reduces the likelihood that the PII could be exposed to an unauthorized user. Local management should determine the proper follow-up timeframe as part of the manager’s operational review.

Non-Evaluative Reviews

  1. The primary purpose of a non-evaluative review is to help employees develop and enhance their job skills. Effective non-evaluative reviews foster open lines of communication between the employee, manager and the lead TE. These reviews enable the manager/lead TE to convey employee feedback and transfer operational goals in an informal manner.

  2. Non-evaluative reviews do not contain a numerical rating. The results are to be shared orally. Some documentation is appropriate to establish the review actually took place (EQRS may be used to track employee development for this purpose).

    1. Have the employee initial and date any documentation.

    2. Provide one copy for the employee and retain the other copy.

Mandatory Reviews - AUR

  1. The manager is primarily responsible for performing evaluative reviews; however, a portion may be delegated to the lead TE, with the exception of IDRS Security Reviews and where only one type of review is required during the employee’s evaluative period. Although performing some of the reviews may be delegated, the manager must always present the results to the employee in order for the review to be used for evaluative purposes.

  2. There are various types of evaluative and non-evaluative reviews used to observe and evaluate employee’s performance throughout the year. The following reviews should be performed to effectively evaluate an employee, if applicable:

    • Paper Case

    • Telephone Monitoring

    • Workload

    • Inventory Management

    • Systems Security

    • Age/Inventory

    • On-the Job

    • Employee Time Report, and other Reports

    • Suspense case reviews

    • Specialized case reviews

      Note:

      This list is not all inclusive.

AUR Quality Review - General

  1. There are four types of review which can be accomplished within the AUR system:

    • Individual Quality

    • Managerial Review - The manager is responsible for managerial reviews

    • Unit Review

    • Underreporter Notice Reviews

    Note:

    A technical review should be performed on No Response and Undeliverable cases.

  2. Current AUR system designs do not allow for two users to easily access the same case simultaneously. If the monitor/reviewer accesses the case before the assistor, it can prevent the assistor from accessing the taxpayer’s account in a timely manner. This presents a challenge when monitoring employee activity on incoming toll-free calls. The monitor can successfully review assistor calls by either:

    1. Utilizing Contact Recording: This functionality records activity for randomly selected call(s) and allows the monitor to review the call(s) at a later time.

    2. Waiting until call completion to access the taxpayer information on the AUR system.

Individual Quality Review

  1. Individual quality review is performed by the designated quality reviewer (manager/lead). To perform these reviews:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Manager from the review menu.

    4. Select Review from the pull right menu. The Case Analysis screen displays with the cursor in the PRIMARY SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed.

    6. Press <Enter> the case data will display.

    7. When the review is complete, press <F8> to exit.

Reviewing Quality Errors
  1. Cases returned from a reviewer and identified as having errors, may be reviewed by the manager.

  2. If the error is not appropriate, return the case to the review examiner for reconsideration following campus directions.

  3. If the error is valid, return the case to the original TE for correction.

Managerial Individual Review

  1. Managerial Individual Reviews are performed by the manager or designated examiner. This review is performed on any TE assigned to their unit.

  2. To perform this review:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Manager from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Review from the pull right menu. The Case Analysis screen displays with the cursor in the PRIMARY SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed.

    6. Press <Enter>. The case data displays.

    7. When the review is complete, press <F8> to exit.

Unit Reviews

  1. Unit Reviews are performed by designated TEs. This review is performed on any batch assigned to a unit.

  2. The review is performed by accessing the History/View/Request Case window.

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select View case from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request Case window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    4. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed. The selected case displays.

    5. When the review is complete, press <F8> to exit.

Notice Reviews

  1. The CP 2000 Notice review is mandated, requiring review results be posted to the Notice Review Tracker on the SharePoint Monday of each week. The review MUST be completed the same week the batch is built.

    Note:

    If Monday is a non-workday (holiday, inclement weather, etc) the tracker must be completed on the 1st workday of the week.

  2. Notice reviews are performed by a designated group of TEs. As there is no file copy of the CP 2000 for review, the review is performed on-line by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Manager from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Review from the pull right menu. The Case Analysis screen displays with the cursor in the PRIMARY SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed. The selected case displays.

    6. When the review is complete, press <F8> to exit.

  3. The review can also be performed by:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Selecting reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Selecting View case from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request Case window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    4. Enter the SSN of the case to be reviewed. The selected case displays.

    5. When the review is complete, press <F8> to exit.

  4. All notice reviews are batched by the control function into BT 95. See IRM 4.19.2.6.62, Batch Type (BT) 95 (Review), for additional information regarding BT 95.

Payer Agent Coordinator

  1. The Payer Agent window is used to input information to identify IRs where an issue with the way the payer reported the income may be present.

  2. There are two types of Payer Agent Coordinators (National and AUR Site).

    1. National Designated AUR Payer Agent Coordinator (currently located in Ogden) is responsible for the input of all Employer/Agent information return documents received from the Enterprise Computing Center at Martinsburg (ECC-MTB) Management and Technology Information Returns Division. See IRM 4.19.3.6.3, National Designated AUR Payer Agent/Fraud Coordinator – Instructions.

    2. AUR Site Payer Agent Coordinator (located at each of the seven sites) is responsible for referrals of questionable/suspicious Payer agent data identified at their site. This includes creating a record in AUR when one does not exist or updating a record when required. See IRM 4.19.3.6.3, National Designated AUR Payer Agent/Fraud Coordinator – Instructions.

  3. New and/or updated Payer Agent information is populated weekly for all the sites when the X007 AUR Run is processed.

Payer Agent/Fraud Coordinator Screens

  1. When the Payer/Fraud menu option is selected a drop-down menu displays the following:

    • Payer Agent - allows Search and New Entry for payer agent information.

    • Payer Agent list - shows a listing of all Payer information loaded into the AUR system.

    • Potential Fraud - allows Search and New Entry for fraud information.

    • Potential Fraud List - shows a listing of all Fraud information loaded into the AUR system

      Note:

      Potential Fraud Listing opens in a BOE window.

  2. When Payer Agent is selected the payer agent window displays. There are two tabs which allow the user to search or input payer agent information or standard paragraphs.

  3. The Payer Agent window allows for Advanced Search and New Entry which displays the following information:

    • EIN –Employer Identification Number

    • Payer Name Lines – Identifies the Payer for which the issue was reported

    • DOC Type –Literal for the type of document received (1098,1099, W-2)

    • Income Type –Literal for the type of income reported (Wage, DCB, MED)

    • Source – How the information was reported either Paper or Magnetic Media Tape (P= Paper, T=Tape)

    • IR’s Updated – Auto populates when the information is created or updated

    • Service Center - which input the payer agent

    • Description – information or instructions pertaining to the issue reported

    Note:

    The Payer Agent window can also be used to search using the EIN. Enter the EIN in the EIN field and press Enter. If no information populates after the EIN is entered, the following error message displays No Payer Agent information is available.

  4. The Standard Paragraphs tab allows the payer agent to add, view, modify and delete paragraphs:

    If Then
    Adding a paragraph
    1. Select ADD button. The cursor moves to the next available line for entry.

    2. Press <CNTRL+E>or double click. The edit paragraph window displays.

    3. Enter paragraph information.

    4. Select the SAVE button.

    Deleting a paragraph
    1. Select the Paragraph Test line

    2. Press the "Delete" button

    3. The system will prompt to ensure this paragraph is to be deleted

    View or Modify a paragraph
    1. Select Paragraph Text line

    2. Press <CNTRL+E>or double click. The Edit Paragraph window will appear

    3. Press "Save" button when finished.

    Caution:

    Once information is saved in the payer agent window it can’t be deleted.

  5. Payer Agent should review the Payer Agent listing when entries have been made as described in (3) above. See IRM 1.4.19.9.6.7, Payer Agent List, for additional information.

  6. When the potential Fraud is selected as described in (1) above, the Potential Fraud window appears. There are two options Search and New Entry:

    If accessing Then
    Search
    1. Select the Search Button. The Search potential Fraud window will appear.

    2. Enter the EIN, Doc Type, Income Type and/or Money amount.

    3. Press <Enter> or Search button. The Fraud information displays in the fields.

      Note:

      If no information populates after the EIN, Doc Type, Income Type and or Money amount is entered, the screen remains blank if nothing was found.

    New Entry
    1. Enter EIN

    2. Enter Payer Name in the Payer Name Lines field.

    3. Enter document type in the DOC Type field.

    4. Enter Income Type, otherwise leave blank.

    5. Enter Money Amount, otherwise leave blank.

    6. Enter P=Paper or T=Tape (magnetic media) in the Source field.

    7. Date - field auto populates with current date.

    8. SC – Service Center, auto populates with Fraud coordinators service center

    9. Fraud Description Notes - Enter specific Instructions for the tax examiner in the Text Lines field

    10. Press the Save button or F4 to commit.

      Caution:

      Once information is committed in the Fraud window it cannot be deleted.

  7. Select New Entry button allows new fraud information to be entered. A Cancel New Entry button will appear in the window.

Monitoring and Reports

  1. While all the reports and listings serve a specific purpose, some have been designated as "Most Important" and should be monitored on a regular basis.

  2. The AUR System provides numerous methods to monitor inventory through history windows and inventory reports. The following reports have been designated "Most Important" :

    1. Complete Batch Inventory Report

    2. Unit Suspense

    3. Aged Response Batch Summary

    4. Inventory

    5. Mistle

    6. Mistle XCL

    7. Notice Letter Listing

    8. Non-Stat Listing

    9. PC Status Listing

    10. Weekly PC/IPC Listing

    11. Unit Inventory

    12. Lost Case Report

    13. Disassemble Age Report

    14. Reject Listing

    15. Batch Released Report

    16. Open Case Listing

    17. Open Transfer Listing

    18. Missing Assessment Report

    19. Statute Listing

    20. Stat Not Generated Report

    21. Extract Cycle Category Listing

    22. IDT Suspense Listing

    23. Restricted Case Report

    24. TDC Notice Suppression

Reports - General

  1. The reports in the AUR System serve two distinct purposes. The first is to provide listings to aid in the flow of work through the units. The second is to provide managers and the AUR Coordinator with information to be used in the coordination and monitoring of inventory.

  2. The report data on the AUR System is classified as either system or user generated. There are two major groupings.

  3. The first grouping is designated as Reports.

    1. Reports contain data elements providing information which allows management to monitor the total inventory.

    2. Reports are usually generated by the system and display all data reflecting the whole system rather than the individual batch information provided by the listings.

      Note:

      Both reports and listings most often reflect real time information rather than cumulative data.

  4. The second grouping is designated as Listings.

    1. Listings are used as transmittal sheets for specific batches of work. Listings break down batch information by Process Codes, Case Sequence Number, and/or SSN.

    2. Listings do not give a comprehensive picture of the inventory and are not usually generated by the system.

    Note:

    A few of the listings are system generated and provide information, which is needed to process cases requiring special handling. See Exhibit 1.4.19-6, AUR Report Matrix, which lists each report and listing with the report frequency, access capabilities, purpose and type of report.

  5. To navigate through a report on the screen, use the mouse or the following keys on the keyboard:

    • End - Takes you to the last page of the report

    • Down Arrow - Moves the cursor down one line

    • Page Down (<pg dn>) - Takes you to the next page of the report

    • Home - Takes you to the first page of the report

    • Up Arrow - Moves the cursor up one line

    • Page Up (<pg up>) - Takes you to the previous page of the report

  6. System generated reports are created weekly during the normal batch processing runs.

Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings
  1. Reports and listings are accessible for viewing or printing.

  2. To access and view a report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu. When the reports menu displays, each type of report or listing available is shown as an option.

    4. Select the report or listing to view/print. The report/listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window or in a Business Object Enterprise (BOE) window.

      Note:

      BOE reports can also be exported to Excel, PDF, HTML, Text and CVS Archive files by using the BOE “Export” button in the BOE menu.

  3. If the report opens in a Microsoft Edge window, you can print the report/listing by taking the following actions:

    1. Select ellipsis options.

    2. Select Print from the drop-down menu.

    3. To exit the report, use the "X" in the top right-hand corner of the report.

    4. Press <F8> to close the Control Menu.

    Note:

    If a print of the entire report is not needed, press the <print scrn> (print screen) key to only print the portion of the report shown on the screen.

  4. If the report opens in a BOE window, you can print the report/listing by taking the following actions:

    1. Click on the ellipsis under File. Select the print option. Click print. The report/listing downloads to PDF for printing.

    2. Click on Open file. The report/listing opens in PDF.

    3. Select File from the menu or click on the printer icon.

    4. If the File option is selected, select Print from the drop-down menu.

    5. To exit the report, select File then Close from the menu options at the top of the report or use the "X" in the top right-hand corner of the report.

      Note:

      If a print of the entire report is not needed, press the <print scrn> (print screen) key to access Snag It to capture the portion of the report shown on the screen.

Batch Reports

  1. The following reports are listed under the ControlBatch menu option:

    • Batch Inventory

    • Batch Listings

    • Batch Released

Batch Inventory Report
  1. Batch Inventory Reports list batches by status in batch number order. These reports are generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator, managers or lead TEs.

  2. This report option contains a menu, which allows the user to select nine data options.

    1. Association Batch - displays screening batches in AB status.

    2. Batch Type - displays a specified batch type.

    3. Complete - displays all batches, their status, days in status, volume, location, and age. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

      Note:

      Use the Complete Batch Report to determine the overall batch processing within your site and to identify any work flow issues, (for example, are batches being disassembled timely, are batches aging without actions). This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

    4. CP 2000 - displays all CP 2000 batches, their status, days in status, volume, location, and age. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

    5. CP 2501 - displays all CP 2501 batches, their status, days in status, volume, location, and age. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

    6. Recon - displays all BT 81, their status, days in status, volume, location, and age. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

    7. Screening Batch - displays all screening batches, their status, days in status, volume, and location. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

      Note:

      System built Screening Batches containing only virtual cases are identified as a Virtual Batch (V) on the reports.

    8. Statutory - displays all Stat Notice batches, their status, days in status, volume, location, and age. The batches display in numerical order for each status.

    9. Unit Suspense - displays the total number of Recon cases assigned to unit suspense batches, the oldest IRS received date and age from the IRS received date. Use this report to determine if the site has excess reconsideration inventory in the unit suspense and to identify pockets of old work.

      Note:

      Managers should monitor this report on a weekly basis. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

    Note:

    For response batches, the virtual field contains a "Y" when the original cases were ELF (virtual) or an "N" when the original cases were paper.

  3. Each data option may be detailed by choosing one or all of the Batch Status Codes or Location Numbers within the selected data option. The Status categories are further broken down by:

    • Batch Number

    • Days in Status

    • Volume

    • Location

    • Batch/IRS Received Date

    • Age from IRS Received Date

    • Volume over 30 Days by Saturday

    • AB Status Date

    • Age from AB Date

  4. The Batch Inventory Report also provides a summary page. This page displays:

    • Batch Status

    • Batch Volume

    • Case Volume (number of cases assigned to batches)

    • Oldest IRS Received Date

    • Age (number of days from IRS Received Date)

  5. To view or print the Batch Inventory Report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Batch from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select batch inventorY from the pull right menu. A pull right menu displays with report options.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The applicable window displays.

      Note:

      The COMPLETE option includes all of the other categories except for Unit Suspense.

    7. If the Batch type option is selected, enter a two-digit batch type (e.g., 29 for Priority Screening, 36 for Screening Unit Suspense).

    8. Default entries appear in the STATUS, LOCATION, SUMMARY ONLY and SORT ORDER fields. To change a default entry, place the cursor in the field, press <DELETE> or <F5> and enter the correct values for each field.

    9. STATUS - enter the current status of the batch being requested (e.g., AU = Assigned Unit, BF = Batch Finished).

    10. LOCATION - enter a three-digit location (unit) number or ALL for all locations.

    11. SUMMARY ONLY - enter either "N" for Detail, which generates a report with batch number, days in status, volume, case volume, location, batch IRS received date, age from IRS received date, and the summary or "Y" for Summary, which generates a report with status, batch volume, case volume, oldest IRS received date and age.

    12. SORT ORDER - enter default entry "S" for sequence order. Click to view report.

      Note:

      Batches containing multiple received dates do not display in date order.

    Note:

    See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  6. The Status categories are displayed as follows:

    • Batch Number

    • Days in Status

    • Volume

    • Location

    • Batch/IRS Received Date

    • Age from IRS Received Date

    • Volume over 30 Days by Saturday

    • AB Status Date

    • Age from AB Date

  7. This report is used to monitor the volume of work available and is continuously updated by the system.

Batch Listings
  1. Batch Listings display all of the cases in a designated batch arranged in a selected sequence order.

    Note:

    Use this option with BT XX950 to identify and monitor UWCs that may need to be released.

  2. As a rule, these listings are not system generated and DO NOT give a comprehensive picture of the total inventory. The header information for all batch listings includes:

    • Batch Number

    • Batch Status

    • Batch Date and

    • Batch Location

  3. The last page of Batch Listings is a summary page which contains total volumes for each data column. Batch listings can be generated for any batch in the system and can be viewed/printed by the user. Batch listings include the following:

    • PC - Sequence Number - SSN

    • Sequence Number - SSN - PC

    • Sequence Number - SSN

  4. To access batch listings:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Batch from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Batch listings from the pull right menu.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (3) above.

    7. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu (Complete or Summary) for the Sequence Number - SSN - PC Listing and the PC - Sequence Number - SSN Listing. The Batch Listings window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    8. Enter the batch number. The selected Batch Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. These listings can also be accessed by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Batch from the Control menu.

    4. Select Status/location from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Status/location from the pull right menu. The Update Batch Status window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    6. Select Reports.

    7. Select Batch listings from the drop-down menu.

    8. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (3) above.

    9. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu (Complete or Summary) for the Sequence Number - SSN - PC Listing and the PC - Sequence Number - SSN Listing. The Batch Listings window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    10. Enter batch number. The selected Batch Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  6. Batch listings are generally used as:

    • Clerical transmittal documents, for each batch in "AB" status

    • Records of batch contents to verify cases within the batch

    • Records of batch contents to locate cases within the batch

    Exception:

    The PC-Sequence Number-SSN Listing is used to identify aged cases and can also be used to compute the screen out rate for the batch.

Sequence Number-SSN-PC Listing
  1. The primary sort of this listing is by sequence number. This listing displays the following data in two columns:

    • Sequence number (depends on the type of batch requested)

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • Process Code

    • Process Code Date

    • Received Date

  2. The last page of this listing is a summary page. This page may be printed and used as a batch transmittal. The summary page contains the following:

    • Process Code(s)

    • Volume for each PC

    • Total volumes of PCs and the batch dates

PC-Sequence Number-SSN Batch Listing
  1. The primary sort of this listing is by PC. The following information is shown, in two series, for each PC in the batch:

    • Sequence Number (This number depends on the type of batch requested.)

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • IRS Received/Suspense Date

  2. The last page of this listing is a summary page. This page may be printed and used as a batch transmittal. The summary page contains the following:

    • Process Code(s)

    • Volume for each PC

    • IRS received date for response batches or the Suspense date for suspense batches for each PC

    • Volume of cases for the IRS received date or the Suspense date and

    • Total volumes for all PCs and the dates

  3. The PC - Sequence Number - SSN Listing should be used to:

    • Identify aged cases, especially those in the "RLS" batch to ensure timely clerical actions

    • Determine screen out rates for screening batches

Sequence Number-SSN Batch Listing
  1. The primary sort of this listing is by sequence number. This listing displays the following data in two columns:

    • Sequence number - depends on the type of batch requested

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

      Note:

      The Total Volume of cases in the batch displays as the last line of the listing.

Batch Released Report
  1. The Batch Released Report displays a list of each batch type updated to Batch Finished (BF) status from all locations for a specified period of time. The listing displays a summary by location and a grand total summary of all locations.

  2. This report can be accessed by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Batch from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select batch "R" eleased from the pull right menu. The Batch Released window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter the beginning and ending dates in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Batch Released Volume Report opens in a BOE Window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use the Batch Released Report to monitor the inventory worked by location and to determine how much work is being completed by the units. This report is used to determine productivity issues.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  5. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Cases In Error Report

  1. The Cases In Error Report identifies cases with error conditions. This report is generated when the status of a specific batch is updated to BF or RB. Technical managers can access this report when updating a batch to BF status.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Cases in error from the drop-down menu.

    5. Enter the batch number and press <Enter>. The Cases In Error Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. The report is used to identify and to resolve cases with error conditions (for example, new transactions, missing PCs, special paragraphs).

  4. It is generated by batch number and can be printed. The left side of the report shows the following case data:

    • SSN

    • Process Code

    • PC SEID

    • Sequence number within the batch

    • Owner SEID

  5. The right side of the report lists the following error conditions which are marked as identified by the system:

    1. NO PC - no PC assigned to the case

    2. DEFECT - case has had a quality defect code assigned

    3. NEW TRN - new transaction is present on the case

    4. PC NOT VER - PC has not been verified (clerical)

    5. PYR AGT - new payer agent information is present for the case

    6. REQUEST - the case has been requested by another user

    7. OVER 100K - the tax increase is over $100,000 and requires review

    8. SPC PAR - a special paragraph needs to be reviewed

    9. LTR PAR - a special paragraph on a correspondex letter needs to be reviewed

    10. ACT REQ - action required based on universal access

    11. PEN STATUS CD - case with a penalty the manager has reviewed

Clerical Reports

  1. The following reports are located under the cLerical menu option

    1. Address update

    2. Aging

    3. Auto Assess

    4. Check date list

    5. Closed research

    6. Disaster CSN/SSN

    7. Lost case

    8. Misc letter

    9. New payer agent

    10. New transaction

    11. Pull listing

    12. Return chargeout

    13. Reworked cases

    14. Release batch

    15. Scanned Images

    16. Undelivered notice

Address Update Report
  1. The Address Update Report provides a listing of cases with a new address since the case was batched into Aged CP 2000 Stat Prep BT 59. When BT 59 is updated to RB status, the system searches for receipt of a new address and identifies those cases.

  2. The report must be printed before the system allows the batch to be updated to "RB" status. This report can be generated in CSN or SSN order.

  3. This report displays three columns of:

    • Sequence Number

    • SSN

      Note:

      A Virtual Indicator (V) appears to the right of the SSN if it is a virtual case.

    • Previous CSN

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select address uPdate from the pull right menu. The Address Update Rpt window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    6. Enter the batch number. The cursor moves to the ENTER SORT ORDER field.

    7. Enter "S" for SSN or "E" for sequence number. The Address Update Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. Use this report each week to pull the cases with updated addresses and build them to Remail CP 2000/Recomp BT 38.

    Note:

    If the system prompts "IPC 6L" is on the case, build these into BT 84.

  6. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Aging Reports
  1. Aging reports identify cases having met a specified number of days, either systemically set or input by the AUR Coordinator, and are considered aged.

  2. The report data can be sorted and displayed by one of the following pull right menu options:

    • Auto purge

    • Complete case

    • Disassem batch

    • Part agreed

    • stat Not gen

    • Susp aged batch

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Then select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (1) above. The selected Aging Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a PDF file down-load or in the BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. These reports are updated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Disassembled/Age Batch Report
  1. This report displays aged cases in batches having been through the disassembly process (DC status). Cases from batches in "DC" status display on the next week's report.

    Example:

    Cases in disassembled batches with IPC MI needing to be built to BT 61 and cases with IPC-RN needing to be built to BT 67.

  2. The Disassembled/Age Batch Report displays two series of the following:

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • Process Code

    • Batch

    • Batch Status Date

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Disassem batch from the pull right menu. The Disassembled Age Batch Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this report on a weekly basis to monitor disassembled batches and SSNs (cases) not built to the appropriate batch.

  5. If the user is unable to locate the case to build, make a site decision to either:

    • Continue processing without the physical case file or

    • Assign the SSN to Lost Case BT 98 and closely monitor for subsequent actions.

  6. This report has been designated one of the"Most Important" .

  7. The Disassembled/Age Batch Report is generated weekly by the system and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Completed Case Report
  1. The Completed Case Report identifies cases in Missing Data Suspense BT 32 when the missing data has been received.

  2. The Completed Case Report displays SSNs followed by the Virtual Indicator (V) if applicable, in four columns. Cases are filed in the Missing Data Suspense in SSN order.

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical form the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Complete case from the pull right menu. The Completed Case Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This report is used each week to pull the cases from the suspense file and build to Completed Cases/Screening BT 31.

  5. This report is system generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Suspense Aged Batch Report
  1. This report indicates which suspense batches have met the appropriate suspense timeframes. The system has checked for the required conditions (for example, foreign addresses, new transactions, and new addresses) before updating each case with a code indicating the batch number for the cases next batch assignment.

  2. The Suspense Aged Batch Report displays the following in two series:

    • Suspense Batch

    • Notice Date of the Suspense Batch

    • Count

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Susp aged batch from the pull right menu. The Suspense Aged Batch Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this report on a weekly basis to monitor suspense batches, ensuring all cases meeting the appropriate suspense timeframes continue through AUR processing. Each week, clerical builds the cases present in the suspense batches listed on the report.

  5. The report is system generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Partially Agreed Aging Report
  1. This report displays Partial Agreed Batches (BT 67 and 87) in "AB" batch status for one or more processing cycles.

  2. The Partially Agreed Aging Report displays the Batch Number and Status Date, the date the batch status was updated.

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Part agreed from the pull right menu. The Partially Agreed Aging Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this report each week to determine which Partial Agreed BT 67 and 87 batches require updating to "RB" batch status, to ensure timely actions and minimal cycle time.

  5. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Stat Not Generated Report
  1. This report provides a list of cases from the prior week's Statutory Notice mailout not receiving a Certified Mail Number, indicating the Statutory Notice of Deficiency was not generated and mailed. The AUR system receives this data from Correspondence Production Services (CPS) within two weeks of the Stat notice date.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR Main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select stat Not gen from the pull-right menu. The Stat Not Generated Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. The Stat Not Generated Report displays:

    • CSN

    • Virtual Indicator

    • SSN

    • SCRS Due Date

    • Total number of cases

  4. This report is used to identify and transfer cases where a Stat Notice was not generated, to the AUR Coordinator or designated SEID.

    Note:

    This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important."

  5. This report is generated weekly by the system and can be viewed or printed for the prior week's Stat Notices.

Auto Purge Pull List
  1. This listing identifies cases containing conditions (fallouts) requiring TE review.

  2. This listing displays the following information:

    • Notice Date

    • Suspense Sequence Number

    • Virtual Indicator

    • SSN

    • Target Batch

    • Fallout Condition

    • Restricted Case Code

  3. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Auto purge from the pull right menu.

    7. Select Auto purge pull list from the pull right menu. The Auto Purge Pull List window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    8. Enter the batch number. The Auto Purge Pull List opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this listing each week to pull and build cases containing conditions (fallouts) requiring TE review.

  5. This list is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed.

Auto Purge Batch
  1. This listing identifies cases remaining in the 40, 50, 55, 60, 70 Suspense batches.

  2. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Auto purge from the pull right menu.

    7. Select aUto purge batch from the pull right menu. The Auto Purge Batch Report window displays.

    8. Enter suspense batch number. The Auto Purge Batch Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This list is generated weekly and can be viewed or printed.

Rb Batches
  1. This listing identities batch types 38, 49, 59, and 79 that were systemically built and ready to be updated to "RB" status.

  2. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Aging from the pull-right menu.

    6. Select Auto purge from the pull-right menu.

    7. Select Rb batches from the pull-right menu. The RB Auto Purge Batches Report displays in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

  3. This report is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed.

    Note:

    See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings,

    for information on how to print reports and listings.

Auto Assessment Report
  1. The Auto Assessment Report provides a listing of cases in sequence number order, which have been automatically assessed in other than a Fully Agreed Response batch.

    Note:

    The auto assessment report does not generate for BT 51, 67, 71, and 87.

  2. This report displays the following data:

    • Process Code

    • New Files Sequence Number

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • SOURCE DOC (An asterisk (*) displays in SOURCE DOC field when there are no attachments to associate with the CF 5147. An N displays in the SOURCE DOC field when there are no attachments for Files to associates.)

      Note:

      The SOURCE DOC field may display "N," R,Y or be blank. No clerical action is required.

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select auto assess from the pull right menu. The Auto Assessment window displays.

    6. Enter the batch number. The Auto Assessment Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. The Auto Assessment Report is used by clerical to ensure cases are in the correct adjustment sequence order for shipment to files. This report should be run after a Disagreed Response batch is completed and updated to "RB" status.

  5. This report is generated after the batch is verified and MUST be printed prior to updating the batch status to RB. The report may be printed or viewed by the Clerical Managers. Clerical Leads, and the Clerks.

Check Date List
  1. The Check Date Listing displays the batch type, notice letter date, suspense batch, and SSN.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select check dtList from the pull right menu. The Check Date Listing window displays in the cursor in the ENTER BATCH TYPE field.

    6. Enter the Batch Type in the BATCH TYPE field.

    7. Enter the Notice Date in the NOTICE DATE field. The Check Date Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listing, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator or Clerical Managers.

Closed Research Reports
  1. Closed research reports provide information on cases with no return transaction information or where the tax return cannot be obtained from the Federal Record Centers.

  2. The Closed research reports drop-down menu option has a pull right menu. Select one of the following closed research reports:

    • Closed Missing Data Case Report

    • Unavailable Return Report

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select closed researcH from the pull right menu.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (2) above. The selected Closed Research Reports opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this report weekly to identify cases that are/can be closed.

  5. These reports are generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Closed Missing Data Case Report
  1. This report displays information on cases in Missing Data Suspense BT 32.

  2. The Closed Missing Data Case Report displays SSNs in four columns. Cases are filed in the Missing Data Suspense area in SSN order.

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select closed researcH from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Missing data from the pull right menu. The Closed Missing Data Case Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this report each week to pull the cases from the suspense file to be refiled at the appropriate FRC.

  5. The Closed Missing Data Report shows SSNs of cases closed since being assigned to Missing Data Suspense batch (BT 32). If data is not secured within 45 days, these cases are systemically closed with a PC 29 or 29K.

  6. This report is system generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Unavailable Return Report
  1. This report displays information on systemically closed cases in Research BT 30 and BT 34 when the research/return has not been received. The system suspends the SSNs for 60 days before systemically closing with either PC 28 or 29.

  2. The system does NOT automatically close Married Filing Separate (filing status (FS) 3) cases. These cases display at the end of the Closed Unavailable Return Case Report and must be manually closed with a PC 29.

  3. The Closed Unavailable Return Case Report displays two series of SSN and the CSN. The Total Volume is shown at the end of the report.

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select closed researcH from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Unavail return from the pull right menu. The Unavailable Return Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. Use this report each week to pull the cases from the suspense file to be refiled to the appropriate Federal Record Center and to identify FS 3 cases requiring closure.

  6. This report is system generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Disaster CSN/SSN Listing
  1. This listing is used to monitor cases, impacted by a declared disaster, within a batch.

  2. This listing displays the following information:

    • Batch Number

    • Batch Sequence Number

    • Work Unit

    • Sequence Number

    • SSN

    • Expiration Date

    • Virtual Case

    • Zip Type

    • Fema Num

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select disaster csn/ssn from the pull right menu. The Disaster CSN/SSN window displays with the cursor in the FEMA NUMBER field.

    6. Enter the FEMA or batch number. The Disaster CSN/SSN Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      Additional entries can be made such as State Code, Disaster Type, Zip code range, and Expire date range. See IRM 1.4.19.12.3.7, Disaster Case Processing, for additional information.

      Caution:

      Enter as much information as you have available. If a batch number is not entered the system checks all open batches which may take several hours to generate.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator.

Lost Case Report
  1. The information displayed on this report represents all cases currently assigned an IPC LC which automatically moves the cases to Lost Case Suspense BT 98. The report data can be sorted by Batch Assigned Date, CSN or SSN.

  2. The following information is displayed:

    1. SSN

    2. Virtual Indicator (V)

    3. Previous Process Code

    4. Process Code Date

    5. Old Batch Number

    6. Old Batch Location

    7. Old CSN

    8. Notice Type

    9. Notice Date

    10. Received Date

    11. Total Volume

  3. To access the Lost Case Report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Then select lOst case from the pull right menu.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (1) above. The selected Lost Case Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Monitor/use this report every week to determine if Lost Cases are being worked timely. Frequently, this batch and the cases assigned there, receive low priority. However, lost cases are a significant contributor to increased cycle time and impact overall program goals (for example, the screening phase is completed, but there are screening cases in the Lost Case Report; cases assigned to this batch for over a year and no action has been taken). If there are a lot of Lost Cases this is an indication the site is having a problem keeping track of their work and could also indicate training needs. Use this report to monitor volumes and as a research document for locating missing cases.

  5. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  6. The Lost Case Report is updated continuously and is generated on demand. It may be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Misc. Letter Listing
  1. This is a listing of cases where a letter was issued to the taxpayer, and another action was taken on the case(s) at the same time. These cases have PCs other than 3L, 3S, 6L, 6S, or 8L.

  2. The Miscellaneous Letter Listing displays the Batch, Sequence Number, Work Unit, Case Number, and SSN in five columns. The listing also displays the total volume of cases.

  3. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Misc letter from the pull right menu. The Miscellaneous Letter window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    6. Enter five-digit batch number. The Misc. Letter Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. The list is used to pull and mail the manual letters (prepared by the TE) from the identified cases.

  5. Clerical generates and prints this listing when a disagreed response batch is updated to "RB" batch status.

New Payer Agent Report
  1. The New Payer Agent report provides a SSN/CSN listing of cases where potential payer agent issue(s) have been identified. This listing is used to identify cases the TEs may have to rework based on new payer agent information.

    Note:

    See IRM 4.19.3.6.2, AUR Site PayerAgent/Fraud Coordinator - Instructions, and IRM 4.19.3.6.3, National Designated PayerAgent/Fraud Coordinator - Instructions, for more information about the payer agent file and AUR payer agent responsibilities.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select New payer agent from the pull-right menu. The New Payer Agent window displays.

    6. Enter the batch number. The New Payer Agent Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and Clerical managers.

New Transaction Report
  1. The New Transactions Report provides a listing, by SSN/CSN, of all cases containing a new transaction prior to the upload for printing the notice.

    Note:

    This report can be generated for BT 89001 (Bankruptcy suspense).

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select nEw transactions from the pull right menu. The New Transactions window displays.

    6. Enter the batch number. The New Transactions Report opens in aBOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing each week to identify cases which need to be reviewed to clear the system identified condition (new transaction).

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Pull Listings
  1. Pull Listings are used to identify the location of a case once correspondence has been received.

  2. The report displays Notice Date, Previous Case, Suspense Sequence Number, Virtual Case field, Current Case, and Sequence Number . Pull Listings can be sorted and generated by Sequence Number or by Notice Date. The pull listing displays a "V" to indicate a Virtual Case.

  3. To print the pull listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select pull listinG from the pull right menu. The Pull Listing window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    6. Enter the batch number and press <Enter>.

    7. The selected Pull Listings open in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Clerical uses this listing after received responses have been built into response batches in the system.

  5. The listing can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Return Charge-out
  1. This option allows the user to reprint Forms 4251 when the return charge-outs are not available for an individual case or cases within a batch.

    Note:

    In an effort to eliminate unnecessary paper inventory, substitute charge outs should only be printed if absolutely necessary.

  2. To access the Return Charge-out:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select return chargeout from the pull right menu. The Return Chargeout window displays.

    6. Enter the SSN. The Return Chargeout opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This option can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Reworked Cases Listing
  1. The Reworked Cases listing displays cases in Review BT 95 which have been reworked by the TE.

  2. The Reworked Case Listing displays three series of Sequence Number and SSN, and the Total Volume of cases in the batch.

  3. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select reworKed cases from the pull right menu. The Reworked Cases window displays.

    6. Enter the batch number. The Reworked Cases Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. The listing is used to identify the cases which must go through the Batch Disassembly Process. The cases in BT 95 not appearing on the list are refiled to the appropriate suspense batch after the batch status is updated to "RB" .

  5. This listing may be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

RLS Batch Status Report
  1. The RLS Batch Status Report identifies cases worked and released through the technical unit release but have not yet been processed by clerical.

  2. The following information displays on the report:

    • Batch (two-digit batch number (36, 45, 65, 75) - shown only once per page)

    • SSN

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • PC

    • PC Date

    • SEID

    • Previous Location

    • Release Case Date

    • UWC CSN (when one is available)

    • RRC (Restricted Case Code)

  3. This report should be run on a daily basis as there are virtual cases not physically available for the clerks to build. These cases should be built from the listing daily.

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select rls Batch from the pull right menu. The RLS Batch Status Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report is used to monitor cases in RLS status to ensure timely clerical processing.

  6. Cases released through Universal Work appear on this report as XX950.

  7. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Scanned Images
  1. This report is used to identify cases in unit suspense released for clerical processing.

  2. The following information displays on the report:

    • SSN

    • IRS Received Date

    • Response Type

    • Special Handling Code

    • Current Batch

    • Process Code

    • Virtual Case Indicator

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Scanned Images from the pull-right menu. The Scanned Images window display with the cursor in the ENTER NOTICE DATE field.

    6. The date defaults in the window to the last day available (the day before the current date) or the user can input the prior date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Scanned Images report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1 Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Undeliverable Report
  1. This report tracks the volume of undeliverables and those with better addresses by notice type.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cLerical from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select undelivered notice from the pull right menu. The Undelivered Notice window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter a beginning date and ending date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Undeliverable report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator or clerical managers.

Coordinator Reports

  1. The following reports are located under the cOordinator menu option:

    1. Action 61 ltr

    2. Auto notice results

    3. Batch irs rcvd

    4. Batch Run By Site

    5. Missing Assess

    6. notice dt List

    7. Open Case listing

    8. Reorder dates

    9. soft notice

    10. Statistical

    11. Weekly reports

Action 61 Report
  1. The Action 61 Letter Report provides a list of batches for which the system has generated Letter 4314-C.

  2. The report displays the following:

    • Batch number

    • Batch status

    • Batch volume

    • IRS Recd Date

    • Letter 4314-C Date

    • Letter 4314-C volume

  3. The IRS received date displayed is the oldest received date for the letters generated. The report also displays total volumes of Letter 4314-C generated and mailed daily, weekly, with a cumulative total of letters mailed at the end of the report.

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu

    5. Select aCtion 61 ltr from the pull right menu. The Action 61 (4314-C) Letter Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. The report is generated when AURX075 is run and can be printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Auto Notice Results Report
  1. This report is used to identify cases that fallout from the Auto Notice Run.

  2. This report displays the following information:

    • SSN

    • Fallout condition

    • Type

    • Run date

    • Subfile

    • Category

    • Subcategory

    • Extract

    • Site

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu

    5. Select aU to notice from the pull right menu. The Auto Notice Results window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

    6. Enter a beginning date and ending date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Auto Notice Results report opens in a BOE report.

Batch IRS Received Date Report
  1. The Batch IRS Received Date Report lists SSNs, older than a specified age, in a specific batch. The cases are listed in sequence number order with SSN.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select batch irs rcVd from the pull right menu. The Batch IRS Rcvd window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BATCH NUMBER field.

    6. Enter the batch number and press <Enter>. The cursor moves to the ENTER NUMBER OF DAYS field.

    7. Enter the number of days and press <Enter>. The Batch IRS Received Date Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this report to monitor the age of cases within a batch.

    Note:

    This report can be used to monitor the date range (mixed dates) used in batch building to ensure aged inventory is not being mixed with new inventory.

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Batch Run By Site
  1. This report is used to monitor AUR run controls to determine if they have completed.

  2. The report displays the following information at the top of each page:

    • AUR Run Control Number

    • Description of Run Number

    • Frequency

  3. The report also displays the following information for each run:

    • Start Dt (displays the date and time the run started)

    • End Dt (displays the date and time the run ended)

    • Run Status

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Batch Run By Site from the pull right menu. The Batch Run By Site window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter the desired "beginning" and "ending" date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Batch Run Report Site Specific opens in a BOE window.

    Note:

    See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

Missing Assessment Report
  1. This report is used to monitor cases where an assessment sent from AUR did not post to IDRS within 1 week.

  2. This report displays the following information:

    • SSN

    • Remark Text

    • Process code

    • Process code date

    • Assessment date

    • 290/291 amount

    Note:

    AUR only receives one update, after the case has been closed, to indicate the assessment did not post. If the assessment posted after the update was received the case information remains on the report.

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Missing Assess from the pull right menu.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and must be run each week to identify cases which need to be reviewed/monitored for missing assessment to post.

  5. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator.

Notice/Mailout Date Report
  1. The Notice/Mailout Date Report lists the mail out dates for the various types of notices listed below. The report lists the Upload Date, Notice Date, the established parameter, Released Volume, Print Notice Date and Print Volume for each notice date. The information on this report updates at the disassemble process.

    • CP 2501 Notice

    • CP 2000 Notice

    • Auto Notice

    • Recomp/Amended/PC57/PC95

    • CP 2057

    • Stat Notice

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select notice dt List from the pull right menu. The Notice Mailout Date Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Open Case Listing
  1. This listing identifies all open cases in a specific tax year. This information is beneficial in identifying cases in a statute year requiring immediate attention.

  2. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Open Case Listing from the pull right menu. The Open Case Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and clerical managers.

Re-Order Dates Report
  1. The Re-order Dates report displays the information from the re-order date screen without being required to change or update the reorder dates already established.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Reorder dates from the pull right menu. The Re-Order Dates Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Only the AUR Coordinator can view or print this report.

Soft Notice Report
  1. This report is used to identify cases that fallout from the Soft Notice Run.

  2. This report displays the following information:

    • SSN

    • Fallout condition

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu

    5. Select soft notice from the pull right menu. The Soft Notice Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

    Note:

    The Soft Notice Report is only available for 30 days after the soft notices have been run.

Statistical Reports
  1. Statistical reports show statistical data by Subfile and Category where an assessment has been uploaded.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Statistical from the pull right menu. The Statistical window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter the desired "Beginning" and "Ending" date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Assessment Report By Date opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report shows statistical data by Subfile and Income Category where an assessment or refund has been uploaded. Use this report to determine how good the inventory HQ selected for the site to work was.

  4. These reports are system generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator.

Weekly Reports
  1. Weekly Reports provide breakdowns of inventory and are system generated during the normal batch processing runs. Report data is maintained by the system until the next time the Report is generated. User generated information is kept for various timeframes, depending on the Report selected. If a paper record is required or desired for any data, it should be printed as soon as it is available and the paper record maintained per campus guidelines.

  2. The following reports display under the weekly reports:

    Note:

    Based on your assigned profile code some of the menu options shown below may not be available.

    1. Non-Stat Listing

    2. Aged Response Batch Summary

    3. Aged Screening Research

    4. Extract Category

    5. Inventory

    6. MISTLE

    7. MISTLE XCL

    8. Notice Letter

    9. Open Transfers

    10. PC Status

    11. Reject List (this option has a pull right menu with Current and History options)

    12. Statute

    13. Weekly PC/IPC

  3. The following subsections provide descriptions of individual reports and more specific information.

Non-Stat Listing
  1. The Non-Stat Listing provides SSNs of cases with non-statutory items. The Tax Court does not have the jurisdiction over certain underpayments and overstatements (non-statutory items). Therefore, when these non-statutory items exist in a case, an assessment or adjustment must be made prior to ASED expiration (IRC 31, IRC 6211 and IRC 6652(b)). See IRM 4.19.3 IMF Automated Underreporter Program.

    Note:

    When a Statutory Notice is issued, and a TC 560 is input to extend the ASED, it does not extend the non-statutory items ASED.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Non-StatListing

      Note:

      See IRM IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing to ensure non-statutory items cases are given priority treatment and assessed timely.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  5. This report must be monitored on a weekly basis.

  6. The listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinators.

Inventory Report
  1. The Inventory Report provides a comprehensive breakdown of the total case inventory by tax year in the site. The report displays the following information (this list is not all inclusive):

    • total volume

    • volume of cases in the screening process

    • cases screened

    • cases closed

    • cases in the CP 2501 phase

    • cases in the CP 2000 phase

    • cases in the response phase

    • cases in the Stat phase

    • cases in suspense

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Inventory from the pull right menu. The Inventory Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this report to determine the overall status of your site's inventory.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. The listing is generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Weekly PC/IPC Listing
  1. The Weekly PC/IPC Listing provides weekly and cumulative volumes for all PCs and IPCs.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Weekly pc/ipc from the pull right menu and input the week ending date in MM/DD/YYY format. The AUR Weekly PC/IPC listing opens in BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing to monitor the use of PCs and IPCs (for example, is the site using PC RN and SR to process their partial agrees; how many letters are they issuing; how many cases are being referred to TAS).

  4. This listing has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. This listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Aged Screening Research Pull List
  1. The Aged Screening Research Pull List displays information on cases more than 30 days old, assigned to Research Suspense (BT 34). The listing provides the following

    • Case Location

    • Assigned Date

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • Process Code

    • Freeze Code

    • Age Over 30 Days

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select aGed scrn rsrch from the pull right menu. The Aged Screening Research Pull List opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Clerical uses this listing to pull the aged cases as the system automatically closes these cases with PC 29 if the case has not been built into another batch within 60 days.

  4. The listing is generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

  5. This listing should be monitored on a weekly basis.

Open Transfer Listing
  1. The Open Transfer Listing displays SSNs, by location, of cases transferred to a user and not accepted within five days. The report further identifies SSNs not accepted within 15 days. The transfer date and SEID are shown to identify the user needing to take action.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Open transfers from the pull right menu. The Open Transfers window displays.

    7. Enter either a specific location number or "ALL" . The Open Transfer List opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This listing should be used each week to identify cases where the transfers have not been accepted and to ensure individual units are working their unit suspense cases timely, ensuring minimum cycle time.

    Note:

    Managers should ensure cases are accepted on a weekly basis and worked/released as quickly as possible.

  4. This listing has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  5. The report is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

Aged Response Batch Summary Report
  1. The Aged Response Batch Summary Report displays batches, older than the age set by the AUR Coordinator, in the parameter table. The primary sort is batch status. The Batch Status Types are broken down by:

    • Batches Being Built (Unassociated)

    • Associated Batches

    • Assigned to Unit

    • Review Sample

    • Batch Finished

    • Unit Suspense Batches

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull-right menu.

    6. Select agd resp Bat sum from the pull right menu. The Aged Response Batch Summary Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1 Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for more information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. The following information displays for each batch status:

    • Response Type

    • Oldest IRS Received Date

    • Age

    • Batch Status Date

    • Batch Status Age

    • Batch Number

    • Volume/Aged Cases

    • Batch Status

    • Batch Location

  4. The Batch Number Types are broken down by:

    • CP 2501

    • CP 2000

    • Statutory Notice

    • Unit Suspense

  5. The Aged Response Batch Summary Report also provides a summary page. This page displays the summary of responses by Batch Status Type, older than the age set by the AUR Coordinator in the parameter table. The summary page displays the following:

    • Batches Being Built

    • Associated Batches

    • Assigned To Unit

    • Review Sample

    • Batch Finished

    • Unit Suspense Batches

      Note:

      The summary page also provides the total volume of all batches meeting the report criteria.

Notice/Letter Suspense Listing
  1. The Notice Letter Listing displays the notice date, original mail volume, Taxpayer Digital Communication volume counts, Auto Generated Notice volume counts, current volume, the system purge date and batch number.

    Note:

    The Original Mailout Volumes column may be misleading due to system parameter constraints.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Notice letter from the pull right menu. The Notice/Letter Suspense Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this report to determine response rates, to ensure the site is purging suspense batches timely and to identify problem cases that have not purged. Cases identified from this report should be monitored/reviewed to ensure they move to the next phase of the program to meet cycle times.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. The listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator or managers.

Extract Cycle Category Listing
  1. The Extract Cycle Category Listing shows the Subfile and Category types in a specific extract cycle. The categories are further broken down into subcategories.

  2. To access and/or print this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Extract cat from the pull right menu. The Extract Category Listing window displays.

    7. Enter the six-digit cycle number (for example 201341). The Extract Category Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is used to monitor the inventory download for each extract.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  5. The Extract Category listing is generated weekly when the extract is downloaded. The listing can be viewed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Statute Listing
  1. The Statute Listing provides SSNs of cases with an imminent statute expiration of 120 days or less. The case sequence number and statute date are displayed with the SSN. The SSNs are shown with the earliest statute dates first.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Statute from the pull right menu. The Statute Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing to ensure imminent statute cases are given priority treatment.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" .

  5. This report must be monitored on a weekly basis.

  6. The listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator or managers.

  7. Verify, on a quarterly basis, the Operation has completed the required search for statute imminent cases and take the following actions:

    1. Complete Form 11122-A, Manager’s Statute Certification.

    2. Forward completed Form 11122-A to the Planning and Analysis (P&A) Staff.

    3. The P&A staff forwards a consolidated Campus report to the Headquarters Statute Analyst.

Reject Listing
  1. The AUR System generates a weekly Reject Listing, identifying rejected cases in CSN. These batches must be monitored weekly to ensure timely actions are taken.

  2. There are seven reject conditions for CP Notices.

    • 1 - Restricted Interest

    • 2 - Military Action

    • 4 - Invalid Interest (per SCRS)

    • 5 - Not found on TlF

    • 6 - Invalid Interest (per AUR)

    • 8 - Disaster Case (Type 4)

  3. The listing is used by clerks to pull the cases and build as follows:

    • Reject codes 1, 2, 4, and 6 are built into BT 61 (Manual Interest)

    • Reject codes 5 and 8 are built into Reject BT 39

  4. The information displayed on the list is as follows:

    • CSN

    • Virtual Indicator (V)

    • SSN

    • Reject Code

    • Total volume for each Reject Code

    • Total Reject Volume

  5. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator form the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Reject list from the pull right menu.

    7. Select Current from the pull right menu opens the most current listing . Selecting History from the pull-right menu opens a historical listing of prior weeks. The Reject Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  6. This listing has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  7. The listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator, clerical managers and the lead clerk.

PC Status Listing
  1. The PC Status Listing provides a period and a cumulative count of each PC uploaded.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Pc status from the pull right menu and input the week ending date in MM/DD/YYY format. The PC Status Listing opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing to see how the inventory has been closed, (for example, determine what percentage of cases were fully agreed, no change rate, screen out rate). The listing can also be used to determine if a site has obtained sufficient closures to meet closure goals.

  4. This listing has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. The listing is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator.

MISTLE Report
  1. The MISTLE Report consists of two pages. The first page of the report provides period and cumulative totals of various PC groups. The second page provides information on in-house correspondence such as: volume of responses built, volume of aged responses, volume of cases awaiting Action 61/Policy Statement P-21-3, and volume of cases awaiting assessments for each phase of the program.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Mistle from the pull right menu and input the week ending date in MM/DD/YYYY format.The MISTLE Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this report each week to monitor the overall progress of the program, including program benchmark dates and closures. The second page of the report is used to monitor in-house correspondence inventory and provides data for the Correspondence Inventory Report (CIR) required by Headquarters.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. This report is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

MISTLE XCL Report
  1. The MISTLE XCL Report displays as an Excel Spreadsheet. The report provides period and cumulative totals of various PC groups, and provides information on in-house correspondence such as: volume of responses built, volume of aged responses, volume of cases awaiting Policy Statement P-21-3, and volume of cases awaiting assessments for each phase of the program.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select cOordinator from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Weekly reports from the pull right menu.

    6. Select mistleXcl from the pull right menu.

    7. Enter the week ending date in the ENTER WEEK ENDING DATE window. The MISTLE XCL report opens in a Microsoft Edge Window as an Excel file download.

  3. Headquarters (HQ) uses this report each week to monitor the overall progress of the program, including program benchmark dates and closures. The report is used to monitor in-house correspondence inventory and provides data for the Correspondence Inventory Report (CIR) required by HQ.

  4. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  5. This report is generated weekly and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinators.

Specialized Reports

  1. The following reports are located under the Specialized menu option:

    1. AN (Auto Notice) review sampling

    2. Batch suspense inventory

    3. Bankruptcy sts

    4. Employee

    5. IDT suspense listing

    6. MFT 31 inventory report

    7. Payer agent list

    8. Recon

    9. Review sampling

    10. Restricted case report

    11. TDC notice suppression

AN (Auto Notice) Reviewing Sampling
  1. The Auto Notice Review Sampling report identifies cases assigned to batch types 27XXX, which are cases screened through the auto notice process.

  2. This report is generated when an auto notice batch is available for review and is usually directed by Headquarters.

  3. The report provides the following information:

    • SSN

    • Name Control

    • Subfile Key

    • Category

    • Sub Category

    • Batch

    • Discrepancies

    • Result Group

    • Result Text

    • Process Code

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select AN Review Sampling from the pull right menu. The AN Review Sampling report opens in a BOE window

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator.

MFT 31 Inventory Report
  1. The MFT 31 Inventory Report identifies cases assigned to batch types 89004, 89005 and 89006. Cases in these batch types have either a single signature of agreement on a jointly filed return or only one spouse has petitioned the U.S. Tax Court (non-petitioning spouse (NPS)).

  2. This report is used to monitor the Agree/Non-agree and NPS Suspense inventory.

  3. The report is divided by batch number (89004, 89005, and 89006) and provides the following information:

    • SSN

    • SEID

    • Process Code

    • IRS Rec'd date

    • Day from Assign Date

    • Days from IRS Rec'd Date

    • Days from Last Letter

    • Days from Last CP Notice

    • Days from Last STAT Notice

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select mFT 31 Inventory Report from the pull right menu. The MFT 31 Suspense Inventory report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report helps monitor Agree/Non-agree and NPS Suspense Inventory (BT 89004, 89005, 89006.)

  6. The Agree/Non-agree Suspense Inventory report is generated weekly. The listing can be viewed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Bankruptcy Status
  1. The Bankruptcy Status Listing displays cases identified as having a "-V" and/or "-W" freeze code present. Bankruptcy cases with a "-V" freeze can be identified by the presence of a TC 520 and closing code 60 through 67, 83 or 85 through 89. Bankruptcy accounts with a "-W" freeze will have a TC 520 with a closing code of 81 or 84. This report also displays freeze code(s), CSN, Virtual indicator, and SSN of each case identified as Bankruptcy when each extract is downloaded.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select banKruptcy sts from the pull right menu. The Bankruptcy Status Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this listing to identify Bankruptcy cases for pre-notice closure.

  4. The listing is generated weekly, can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

    Note:

    In addition to the AUR reports, bankruptcy inventory should be monitored every month using AIS, PACER, and IDRS.

Specialized Batch Suspense Inventory Report
  1. The Specialty Batch Suspense Inventory report identifies cases assigned to batch types 89001, 89003, and 94. Cases in these batch types are either bankruptcy, identity theft, or fraud.

  2. This report is used to monitor the bankruptcy, identity theft, and fraud suspense inventories.

  3. The report is divided by batch number (89001, 89003, and 94) and provides the following information:

    • Virtual Indicator

    • SSN

    • SEID

    • Process Code

    • Days from Assign date

    • Days from IRS Rec’d date

    • Days from Last Letter

    • Days from Last STAT Notice

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Batch Suspense Inventory from the pull right menu. The Specialty Batch Inventoryreport opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. The Specialty Batch Suspense Inventory report is generated weekly. The report can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Employee Reports
  1. The Employee reports provide information specific to employee cases.

  2. This report option contains a menu, which allows the user with a specialized profile code to pull five different reports.

    • Auto Assessment

    • Closed Inventory

    • Employee Aging

    • Open Inventory

    • Open Transfers

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu

    5. Select eMployee from the pull right menu.

    6. Select one of the available options from the pull right menu. The listing options display in the order stated in (2) above. The selected Employee Report opens in either a Microsoft Edge or BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. These employee case reports can only be accessed, viewed and/or printed by the manager authorized to handle employee cases and by the AUR Coordinator.

Open Inventory Report - Employee Cases
  1. The Open Inventory Report displays cases in BT 90 and 91 in CSN order and cases in BT 92 in SSN order.

  2. To access this report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.5, Employee Reports.

  3. Use this report to monitor open employee cases.

  4. This report is generated weekly by the system.

Closed Inventory - Employee Cases
  1. The Closed Inventory report displays all closed employee cases. This report displays the SSN, SEID, Process Code, and Process Code date.

  2. To access this report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.5, Employee Reports.

  3. This report is generated weekly by the system.

Open Transfers - Employee Cases
  1. The Open Transfer report displays the SSNs of employee inventory, by location, of cases transferred from one user to the user authorized to work employee cases and not accepted by the receiving user within five days. The report further identifies SSNs of cases not accepted within 15 days. The transfer date and receiver SEID are shown to identify the user needing to take action.

  2. To access this report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.5, Employee Reports.

  3. The report is updated by the system weekly.

Auto Assessment Report - Employee Cases
  1. The Auto Assessment Report provides a listing of SSNs, in sequence number order, of employee cases which have been automatically assessed in other than a Fully Agreed Response batch. This listing is accessed to ensure employee cases are in correct adjustment sequence series order for shipment to files. An asterisk (*) displays in the NO SOURCE DOC field when there are no attachments to associate with the Computer Form (CF) 5147.

  2. To access this report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.5, Employee Reports.

  3. Generate this report after an employee batch is completed and updated to "RB" status. This report is updated daily by the system and must be printed daily. Each time the AURX060 is run, the report displays new information.

Employee Aging Report
  1. The Employee Aging Report indicates which employee cases have met appropriate timeframes, employee cases closed by the system and employee cases where missing data was received.

  2. To access this report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.5, Employee Reports.

  3. The report is updated weekly.

  4. The report can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and the manager authorized to handle employee cases.

IDT Suspense Listing
  1. The IDT Suspense List report identifies cases assigned to batch type 89003 that have been sent to IDTVA for determination.

  2. This report is generated to monitor IDT inventory to ensure timely follow up.

  3. This report provides the following information:

    • Primary SSN

    • Secondary SSN

    • Process Code

    • Process Code Date

    • Days from Process Code

    • Statute Date

    • Days From Statute

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select iDt suspense listing from the pull right menu. The IDT Suspense Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and monitored on a regular basis.

  6. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinators and Technical Managers.

Payer Agent List
  1. The Payer Agent list provides a listing of all identified payer agents.

  2. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select payEr agent list from the pull right menu. Select one of the options from the drop-down menu. The Bad Payer List opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This listing can also be accessed/printed by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Payer/Fraud from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select payerAgent list from the drop-down menu. The Bad Payer List opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This listing is system generated and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator and the Payer Agent Coordinator.

Recon Reports
  1. The Recon reports provide information specific to recon cases.

Recon - Open Inventory
  1. The information displayed on this report represents all cases currently assigned to BT 81 and BT 82.

  2. The following information is displayed:

    • CSN

    • SSN

    • Current SEID

    • PC

    • PC Date

    • SEID

    • Received Date

    • ASED Date

  3. To access the Recon Open Inventory Report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Then select Recon from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Open inventory from the pull right menu. The Open Inventory Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Monitor/use this report every week to determine if Recon Cases are being worked timely.

  5. The Recon Open Inventory Report is updated continuously and is generated on demand. It may be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator.

Recon - Closed Inventory
  1. The information displayed on this report represents all cases currently assigned to BT 96002.

  2. The following information is displayed in two columns:

    • SSN

    • SEID

    • PC

    • PC Date

  3. To access the Recon Open Inventory Report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Then select Recon from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Closd inventory from the pull right menu. The Closed Inventory Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Monitor/use this report to determine the volume of Recon Cases closed for a specific tax year.

  5. The Recon Closed Inventory Report is updated continuously and is generated on demand. It may be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator.

Recon - Issue Listing
  1. The report displays the total volumes of Recon Codes by date range.

  2. The following information is displayed:

    • Reconsideration Code

    • Reconsideration Issue

  3. To access the Recon Issue Listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu

    5. Then select Recon from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Issue from the pull right menu. The Recon Issue Report window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    7. Enter the desired "Beginning" and "Ending" date in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Recon Issue Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Monitor/use this report to determine the volume of Recon Issue Codes.

    Note:

    Recon Issue Codes can be edited or deleted (set to "Reserved" ) by HQ Analysts.

  5. The Recon Issue Listing is updated continuously and is generated on demand. It may be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator.

Review Sampling - Product Review Sample List
  1. The Product Review Sample List provides a listing of SSNs with a specified PC and in a specific batch. When generating the report, the system prompts the user for sample size.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select review samplinG from the pull right menu.

    6. Select Prod revw smpl from the pull right menu. The Create Product Review Sample window displays with the cursor in the BATCH NUMBER TO BE REVIEWED field.

    7. Enter the batch number to be reviewed. The cursor moves to the PROCESS CODE TO BE REVIEWED field.

    8. Enter the PC to be reviewed. The cursor moves to the SAMPLE PERCENT TO BE SELECTED field.

    9. Enter the two-digit percent of sample size (01-50). The Product Review Sample List opens in a Microsoft Edge window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. Use this list to generate a random sampling of work for managerial product reviews.

  4. This listing is generated on demand and is available to technical managers for their unit only.

Restricted Case Report

  1. The Restricted Case Report identifies cases with restricted case indicators in the AUR system.

  2. This report is generated to monitor the status of cases having a restricted case code.

  3. The report provides the following information:

    • SSN

    • Old UID

    • Batch

    • Batch Status

    • Process Code

    • Process Code Date

    • Restricted Case Code

    • Purge Date

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Restricted case report from the pull right menu. The Restricted Case Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and monitored on a daily basis.

    Caution:

    Cases identified as batch status RLS need to be processed by clerical in a timely manner.

  6. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinators.

TDC Notice Suppression

  1. Beginning in TY 2021, the TDC Notice Suppression report will be available to identify cases where notices have been suppressed.

  2. This report is generated to monitor TDC cases where the taxpayer has been issued a notice using a PDF document through eGain, with no mail out to the taxpayer. The cases are monitored by the SSN to verify notice was issued through eGain.

  3. The report provides the following information:

    • SSN

    • Current Batch

    • Current PC

    • Notice Date

    • TDC Upload By

    • Uploaded

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Specialized from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select TDC Notice Suppression from the pull right menu. The TDC Notice Suppression opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. This report has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and monitored on a weekly basis.

  6. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinators and Clerical Managers.

Telephone Reports

  1. The following reports are located under the Telephone menu option:

    • Telephone Case call out

    • Telephone Tracking report

Telephone Case Callout
  1. The data for this report is pulled from cases where an outcall was indicated on the account.

  2. The report displays the following information:

    • SSN

    • Category Code

    • Category Description

    • Correspondence Date

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Telephone from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select case callout from the pull right menu. The Telephone Case Outcall Report window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field. The Telephone Case Outcall report opens in a BOE window

    6. Enter the desired beginning and ending dates in the MM/DD/YYYY format.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Use this list to generate a report of cases where an outcall was made.

  5. This report is generated on demand and is available to view or print by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Telephone Tracking Report
  1. The data for this report is pulled from cases where the phone contact box was checked.

  2. This report displays the following information:

    • Number of calls received by category

    • Number of calls received by sub-file

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Telephone from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select telephone tracking from the pull right menu. The Telephone Case Tracking Report window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter the desired beginning and ending dates in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Telephone Case Tracking Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Unit Inventory Report

  1. The Unit Inventory Report identifies the cases assigned to each TE in a unit.

  2. The report displays the following information for each TE assigned to the unit:

    • TE Name

    • SEID

    • Location

    • Employee Status code

  3. The report also displays the following information for each case assigned to each employee:

    1. Batch number

    2. Work Unit (WU)

    3. Sequence Number

    4. SSN

    5. Assigned date

    6. PC

    7. PC date

    8. PC UID (SEID)

    9. Received Date

    10. DEF CD

    11. NEW TRN

    12. READ ONLY

    13. CORR RECD

    14. BP CD

    15. SPEC PARA

    Caution:

    Cases assigned to TEs through Universal Work (location XX950) do not appear on the Unit Inventory Report. Use Batch Listing (XX950) to identify and monitor UWCs needing to be worked.

  4. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select Unit inventory from the drop-down menu.

    5. Enter either location number, a specific SEID,or "ALL" . The Unit Inventory Report opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. Use this report to monitor employee and unit inventories to determine if a unit or an employee is having difficulty working their inventory in a timely manner. As cases assigned to unit suspense are not used to determine "aged inventory" it is vital that employee unit suspense activity be closely monitored.

  6. This listing has been designated as one of the "Most Important" and should be monitored on a weekly basis.

  7. This report is generated on demand and can be printed or viewed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Universal Reports

  1. The following reports are located under the uNiversal menu option.

    • Universal View Case (UVC) Action Listing

    • UVC Activity Report

    • UVC Summary Listing

    • Universal Work Cases (UWC) Activity Report

Universal View Case Action Listing (UVC)
  1. This listing identifies cases viewed by another site (per phone call) and determined to have some type of action needed on the case (Action Required box is checked) that can’t be taken through UWC.

  2. This report is used to ensure timely actions are taken on these cases.

  3. The report consists of six columns for the following:

    • CSN

    • STATUS

    • SSN

      Note:

      A Virtual Indicator (V) displays to the right of the SSN if it is a virtual case.

    • Contact Date

    • Age From Contact Date

    • UID (SEID)

  4. To access this listing:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select uNiversal from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select uVc action list from the pull right menu. The Universal View Case Action Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  5. The telephone contact is considered a taxpayer response and cases on this listing are handled like a response.

  6. The UVC Listing requires special handling. Use this listing each week to build to the appropriate response batch type or transfer to a locally designated SEID.

    Note:

    An SSN does not drop off the UVC Action Listing until a TE takes the needed action and unchecks the box; therefore, SSNs show up on the Listing each day until a TE has worked the case.

  7. This report can be generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and managers.

UVC Activity Report
  1. This report displays the Period Volume and Total Volume, by site, of cases accessed as:

    • "info only" through Universal View Case

    • "action required" through Universal View Case

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select uNiversal from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select uvC activity from the pull right menu. The UVC Activity window displays with the cursor in the ENTER BEGINNING DATE field.

    6. Enter the desired "Beginning" and "Ending" dates in MM/DD/YYYY format. The Universal View Activity Summary Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Universal View Case Summary Listing
  1. The Universal View Case Summary Listing provides weekly and cumulative volumes relating to universal view case activity. The listing displays Case Actions and Info Only access the other 6 sites have taken on your inventory, as well as Case Actions and Info Only access your users have taken on the other 6 sites inventory.

  2. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select uNiversal from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select Uvc summary from the pull right menu. The Universal View Case Summary Listing opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  3. This report is generated weekly and can be viewed or printed by the AUR Coordinator.

UWC Activity Report
  1. This report identifies cases assigned to users at your site through Universal Work and have not yet been released.

  2. This report displays the following information:

    • Batch Number

    • SSN

    • Process Code

    • Process Code Date

    • Assigned to SEID

    • AUR Site

  3. To access this report:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the Control menu.

    4. Select uNiversal from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select uWc activity from the pull right menu. The Universal Work Case Summary Report opens in a BOE window.

      Note:

      See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print reports and listings.

  4. Monitor this report each week to ensure UWC (location XX950) cases are being released timely.

  5. This report is generated on demand and can be viewed and printed by the AUR Coordinator and technical managers.

Batch History

  1. While the Batch History is not a report it provides a complete history of any action taken on the batch.

  2. To view the Batch History:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Batch from the Control menu.

    4. Select batch History from the Batch menu. The Batch History window displays with the cursor in the BATCH field.

    5. Enter the batch number and press <Enter>. The current batch history displays.

    6. Press <F8> to exit.

    Note:

    To query another Batch History, the user can press <F7> to clear the screen and enter the next batch number without exiting the window.

Case History

  1. While the Case History is not a report it provides a complete history of any action taken on the batch.

  2. Users with a clerical profile access case history by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Case history from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN.

    6. Press <Enter> and <Enter> again to bypass the PHONE CONTACT box.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. Users with a technical profile access case history by taking the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select reView from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case history from the drop-down menu. The History/View/Request window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    4. Enter the SSN.

    5. Press <Enter> and <Enter> again to bypass the PHONE CONTACT box.

    6. Press <F8> to exit.

  4. If a print of Case history is needed take the following actions,

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Print from the Control menu.

    4. Select Case contents from the drop-down menu.

    5. Select case History from the pull right menu. The SSN FOR PRINT window displays with the cursor in the ENTER SSN field.

    6. Enter the SSN. The Case History Transcript opens in a Microsoft Edge window as a text document file.

    7. See IRM 1.4.19.9.1.1, Accessing and Printing Reports and Listings, for information on how to print.

Non AUR System Reports

  1. There are times when it is necessary to access reports not on the AUR system (for example IDRS reports, ORCAS). For additional information on IDRS security see IRM 10.8.34, IDRS Security Controls.

IDRS Case Monitoring Reports (Control D)

  1. Control-D is Web Access software which allows viewing of reports electronically. Control-D reduces the print output and allows faster access and greater report management for users to their respective report files.

  2. Users are required to complete BEARS process to gain access to Control-D.

  3. Reports are made available to the users upon logging in to the Control-D server. This action is necessary to ensure employees have access to the correct Organization and workload.

  4. Some of the Control - reports accessed by AUR users are:

    • CCA 4243

    • AMRH transcripts

    • Statutory notice

    Note:

    This list is not all inclusive.

IDRS CCA 4243

  1. The IDRS CCA 4243 Report is generated weekly and is accessed using Control D. It contains all cases controlled to an IDRS employee number (in IRS received date order) and must be reviewed and monitored on a weekly basis to ensure inventory is moved according to first in/first out (FIFO) order. Managers use this report to:

    • Identify cases requiring action

    • Identify specific cases for review

    • Monitor the size of the employees' inventories

    • Determine if employees are working inventory in the proper order

    • Identify potential management problem cases

    • Monitor AMRH transcripts

  2. In addition, discrepancies between the CCA report and physical inventory are identified. Timely action should be taken on the following:

    • Unpostable conditions

    • Aged correspondence

    • STAUPS

    • Statute imminent cases

    • Interim letters

    • Erroneous/multiple control bases

    • Open control bases on resolved cases

    • AMRH transcripts

  3. The Manager/Lead should utilize CCA 4243 as a tool to identify weekly receipts and closures under each category and the number of cases aged upon receipt.

  4. Department Managers or a delegate should review the report to monitor the number of cases and age of inventory in each category to determine if resource changes are needed. The Department Manager should maintain a copy of these reports for one year.

  5. This report is generated weekly and can be accessed by anyone who has authorization to use Control D. For more information refer to your local Planning and Analysis (P&A).

Overage Report Compiler And Sorter (ORCAS) Reports

  1. ORCAS is an overage report generation system that utilizes the Control D 4243 report to create a personalized listing for the user. ORCAS will present the user with data from their assigned and controlled IDRS cases.

  2. ORCAS provides the same data described in IRM 1.4.19.10.2(4) above. The data is generated in Microsoft Excel format which allows the user to sort and filter the data as needed.

  3. ORCAS is available to all Service Centers: and is available to anyone needing to monitor their controlled IDRS inventory.

    Note:

    The ORCAS Delivery System has different versions and is managed at a campus level for security purposes. To gain access, contact your Service Centers POC at the following link ORCAS Point of Contact.

  4. Once access is granted, it is recommended the ORCAS icon be saved to the desktop and run the application from there each week.

    Note:

    A Team ORG must be established in Control D in order for ORCAS to generate a report.

  5. The import process can take an extended amount of time. On average ORCAS delivers about 3,000 cases a minute. Once the operation has completed, ORCAS will alert you when the operation is completed/done. Do not interrupt the process.

  6. Once the information is imported to the ORCAS database, users can then use the TE and Manager version of ORCAS to pull their data. ORCAS delivery will automatically clear out the prior week data as well as update the run date.

  7. Management is able to view all the team listings for the operation from the ORCAS team selection window. Team Managers should select their team’s number from the list to view.

  8. ORCAS will save your settings for the next time you pull your report. Multiple teams can be selected and viewed together on the same report by selecting multiple teams.

  9. Changes to your team selection can be made using the “Options” button in the main sheet and then selecting the “Update Teams” button. ORCAS then generates your report.

  10. Tax Examiners using ORCAS for the first time will be alerted their IDRS number is not in the server and needs to be input. Tax Examiners need to log into IDRS so ORCAS can locate their IDRS number and store it in the server. After the initial request their IDRS number is stored and logging into IDRS will not be required. Once completed ORCAS will generate the aged listing for the specific user.

Control D - Statutory Notice of Deficiency

  1. All file copies of an AUR Statutory Notice of Deficiency are housed on Control D.

  2. When a request for a copy of a statutory notice of deficiency is received (for example, Appeals), Control D must be accessed to locate the requested file copy for tax year’s not in the AUR system.

  3. There are several filters available to assist in locating the file. Only the following filter option is used by AUR: Remark.

  4. To filter the report take the following actions:

    1. Click on Filter, a box named Filter Report List appears.

    2. Enter notice date in "YYYYMMDD" format in the Remark field.

    3. Click the "Migrated" check box in the Report Status box.

    4. Click "Apply" . This pulls up all notices for the specified date.

  5. If unable to locate the file copy, send an email via secured messaging to the designated HQ Analyst.

  6. This report is generated weekly and can be accessed by anyone who has authorization to use Control D.

Security

  1. The AUR System security is designed to protect both the taxpayers and the AUR users. It is important to protect taxpayer data from unauthorized disclosure. It is equally important to prevent unauthorized adjustments to taxpayer accounts. Designated employees are given specific security responsibilities to protect hardware, software, and taxpayer information.

Roles and Responsibilities

  1. The System Security Analyst (SSA) duties are usually assigned to the AUR Coordinator. SSA responsibilities include:

    1. Completing the actions necessary to add new users, delete users and/or update existing users.

    2. Notifying management officials of any known or suspected security breaches.

  2. AUR managers and the AUR Coordinator responsibilities include:

    1. Providing for the physical and system security in their area (This includes questioning anyone attempting to use the AUR equipment if their identity and purpose is not known).

    2. Initiating the addition, update and deletion of users.

    3. Serving as backup, when needed, for another AUR manager to initiate adding, updating, and deleting users. Only an AUR Coordinator can add or update an AUR manager on the system.

    4. Unlocking SEIDs and/or AUR terminals.

    5. Assigning/updating appropriate status and profile codes for users.

    6. Changing a user’s unit location number when appropriate. This function should only be used when an employee is reassigned to another unit.

    7. Informing employees about their Security responsibilities.

  3. AUR users are responsible for the following:

    1. Using the AUR system and data only in performing their official duties.

    2. Safeguarding data and equipment.

    3. Reporting any infractions to the manager.

    4. Protecting their passwords.

Logins, Passwords and Single Employee Identification (SEID)

  1. When a user is added to the AUR system, the employee is identified by their SEID. The SEID is a combination of numeric and alpha characters.

  2. New users are required to complete the BEARS process to gain access to AUR. Once the BEARS has been approved a login and temporary password will be generated by the AUR system.

    Note:

    New AUR users will also need to request BOE USER PROD (AUTOMATED UNDERREPORTER-AUR) through BEARS to gain access to Business Objects (BOE) to access certain reports.

  3. The first time the user logs on the AUR System using their temporary password, the system forces the user to change their password. The new password expires at a maximum of 90 days.

  4. When a user forgets their password, a manager or AUR Coordinator has the ability to issue a temporary password and will take the following actions:

    1. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    2. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    3. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    4. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡

      Note:

      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    5. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

      Caution:

      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    6. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡≡ ≡ ≡

      Note:

      ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    7. ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

  5. After a temporary password is established, the user logs into the AUR System. An error message displays stating the password has expired. The user enters a new password.

  6. The system requires a password change at least every 90 days. Shortly before this time expires the user is prompted to choose a new password.

    Caution:

    This message should not be ignored.

  7. The user is allowed to change their password once in any 24-hour period time by selecting the Change Password option on the Security menu.

Locking and Unlocking Terminals

  1. Users can lock their workstations without exiting the system. The workstation should be locked anytime a user is logged on and must be away from the workstation for any length of time.

    Note:

    If there is no keyboard activity for 15 minutes at anytime the user is logged on, the workstation automatically locks. The screen remains locked until the current user’s Smart Card password is reentered.

  2. Users must log off at the end of a shift.

Unauthorized SSN Access

  1. SSN access restriction: The user is prevented from accessing any SSN which is not assigned to the user. This restriction, however, does not apply to View Case options or users who have Universal Access permissions.

  2. Locked SEID: The system locks a user’s SEID after three successive unauthorized SSN access attempts and returns the user to the Login screen. The user’s status is automatically changed to "Locked" . If the user attempts to login, the system displays an error message and logs the user off the system.

Locking/Unlocking SEIDs

  1. When users are in production status, they are prevented from accessing any SSN not assigned to them (except when using Universal or View Case options). After three attempts to access a case not assigned, the system locks the user’s SEID and the user cannot proceed until their account is unlocked by a lead, manager or AUR Coordinator. The user Administration screen displays Locked in the Account Status field.

  2. To unlock a SEID:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Enter the locked SEID in the SEID field.

    4. Click on the ACCOUNT STATUS field. The field changes to "Open" .

    5. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. When a user needs their session restarted due to a power outage, screen freeze, ungraceful logout (for example, Task Manager), the AUR System automatically resets the session upon login.

AUR Inactivity Lock
  1. After accessing a Tax Year and there has been no activity for that TY for 8 hours or longer, the system places an Inactivity Lock on AUR. An error message displays indicating inactivity. Use Task Manager (End Task) in order to exit AUR and allow relogin.

Profile Codes and Limitations

  1. Profile Codes are established so managers and AUR Coordinators can provide users with the appropriate access to the segments of the system (menu options) the users need to perform their responsibilities. Listed below are the different profile codes, titles, description and limitations for each site or ORG

    Profile Code Title Description Limitation
    2100 Tax Examiner Allows the user the ability to screen and work responses N/A
    2234 Lead Tax Examiner A tax examiner who can assist the manager in controlling work, perform some employee reviews, and address user profile issues 2 Per Org
    2230 Back up lead A tax examiner who can assist the lead in controlling work and some employee reviews. 2 Per Org
    5200 Technical Manager Manager for tax examiners and can assist with screening and response work. Has access to most reports and is able to transfer cases. Access to make profile changes/verifications. Responsible for employee reviews. 1 Per Org
    5834 Employee manager Manager for tax examiners who work the employee cases. Have access to work both screening and responses. Has access to most report and is able to transfer cases. Access to make profile changes/verification. Responsible for employee case reviews. 2 Per site
    8234 Employee Coordinator Allows users to access employee case files. Can build and release the case work for security reasons. Has access to reports and can transfer cases when needed. 2 Per site
    9899 Employee HQ Analyst Allows user to access employee case files. Access to reports and can transfer cases when needed N/A
    4000 Clerk Allows the user the ability to control the AUR inventory. N/A
    4004 Clerk lead A clerk who can assist the manager in pulling the needed reports ensuring the AUR inventory is moved and controlled timely. 2 Per Org
    5400 Clerical Manager Manager for clerks and can assist with the clerical work. Has access to reports needed in controlling AUR inventory and is able to transfer cases. Responsible for user profile changes/verifications. Responsible for employee reviews. 1 Per Org
    7234 Special Project Coordinator Allows user to access reports and transfer from speciality batches 10 Per site
    9000 AUR Coordinator Coordinator who has the ability to work all phases of AUR. Can transfer cases and review them as needed. Has access to almost all report. Set up or change profiles as needed. 2 Per site
    9100 Back up coordinator User who can aid the AUR coordinator work all phases of AUR. Can transfer cases and review them as needed. Has access to almost all reports. Set up or change profiles as needed. 10 Per site
    6000 Satellite User Allows user view case only access. N/A
    9999 HQ Analyst HQ Analyst who can work all phases of AUR. Can transfer cases and review them as needed. Has access to all report. User can set up or modify profiles as needed. N/A

Status Codes

  1. Status Codes designate the working status of a user. The manager or AUR Coordinator assigns users one of the following status codes:

    • P (Production) - able to perform all assigned work

    • F (Furloughed) - unable to access the AUR system

    • I (Inactivated) - extended detail out of AUR and unable to access the AUR system

    • D (Deleted) - no longer working in AUR

    • R (Reactivated) - user is returning to AUR following Status Code F or I,

      Note:

      Status Code R does not display.

User Administration Screen Tabs

  1. The AUR system stores various information that can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate tab in the User Administration screen. The following tabs are available in the User Administration screen:

    • User

    • History

    • Group

    • Audit

    • Archive

    • Unit

    • New Loc

    • Profile limits

User Tab
  1. The User tab is used to add, delete and/or change information for a specified user.

  2. Data for any user can be researched by accessing the User tab as follows:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Enter the SEID of the user to be researched and click the Query button.

    4. Press <F8> to exit.

Adding/Reactivating Users
  1. Users must not be added to the AUR system until the BEARS process has been completed. Once BEARS has been approved, Managers are responsible for adding their employees to the system. If the user’s manager is not available, another manager or the AUR Coordinator can add the user. The SSA or the AUR Coordinator adds all managers to the system.

    Note:

    Once a user has been placed in "D" (deleted) status they must be added to the system as a new user.

  2. The employee agrees to all AUR Security rules by electronically signing BEARS which is electronically maintained at each site.

  3. To add a user, take the following actions:

    1. Access the User Administration Screen by selecting Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab.

    3. Enter the user's SEID in the SEID field.

    4. Click in the SSN field and enter the user’s SSN.

      Note:

      The system checks to see if the SSN is currently being used. If the information is found, the system displays the user's information in the remaining fields. If no information is found, go to step 5.

    5. Enter the user’s last name in the LAST NAME field.

    6. Enter the user’s first name in the FIRST NAME field.

    7. Enter the user’s middle initial in the MIDDLE INITIAL field. If no middle initial, enter "X" .

    8. Enter the unit phone number in the PHONE field.

    9. Enter the user's start time (TOD) in the HOURS field.

    10. Enter the user's ending time (TOD) in the TO field.

    11. Enter the user's IDRS number (optional) in the IDRS field.

      Note:

      The LOCATION is system populated with the user’s site location (for example, 19 would display for users in Brookhaven).

    12. Enter the user’s assigned location number in the UNIT LOCATION field.

    13. Click on the RECON field if the user needs to access recon cases.

    14. Click on the UNIVERSAL WORK CASE field if the user needs access to Universal case permissions.

    15. Click on the BANKRUPTCY field if the user needs access to Bankruptcy case permissions.

    16. Click on the INNOCENT SPOUSE field if the user needs access to Innocent Spouse permissions

    17. Click on the ID THEFT field if the user needs access to identity theft work.

    18. Click on the RESTRICT CASE field if user needs access to Restricted Cases.

    19. Enter the appropriate profile code in the PROFILE CODE field.

    20. Enter the assigned organization code in the ORG number field.

      Note:

      The remaining fields in the Manager Information section automatically displays when the ORG number field is entered. This information is pulled from the Unit Reference Tables. Verify the information on the screen. If the user should be assigned to a different ORG number, make the appropriate change.

  4. The system allows only one manager per unit. If there is a manager currently in a unit and the AUR Coordinator is adding a new user to the unit with a manager profile code, or updating an existing user, the Change Unit Reference screen appears, displaying the current manager.

    1. Enter the updated information in the NEW ENTRY FOR UNIT REFERENCE.

    2. After clicking in the YES block of the UPDATE INFORMATION field, the Unit Reference Table updates to change the manager of record to the new manager.

    Note:

    The profile code of the current manager automatically changes to 3238.

Updating and Deleting Users
  1. Individual user data can be updated by accessing the User Administration screen. When this window is accessed, all existing data for a user displays. All fields can be changed by the AUR Coordinator or manager. Any field not changed remains as it appears on the screen.

    Exception:

    The SSN can only be changed by the AUR Coordinator, see (2) below.

  2. To update the SSN click on the Update SSN (radio button), a small window pops up with the displayed user’s SSN. To change the SSN, type in the new SSN and press ENTER.

  3. To update the AUR status field of individual or multiple users in the same unit, the Update Group Status window can also be used.

    Note:

    The status code and for multiple users can be done by using the Group Status Update, see IRM 1.4.19.11.8.3, Group Tab.

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Enter the SEID.

    4. Press <Enter>. The system populates the remaining information for the user.

    5. Click on the AUR Status field.

    6. Enter the new status code of the user.

      Note:

      Whenever a user is updated to, D, status, the system removes the user completely from system data base. A BEARS must also be done to remove the AUR application from the individual.

    7. Press <F4> to commit.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

  4. When updating a user’s AUR status code to "R" , the AUR Coordinator reactivates the user by clicking.

  5. When making multiple changes to a manager’s AUR account, changes must be made in the following sequence to ensure the system properly updates the related tables:

    • Organization Code

    • Profile Code

    • Location Code

Changing a User’s Unit Location Number
  1. A user’s UNIT LOCATION number can be changed if a user needs to work in a different location.

  2. To change a user’s Unit Location number:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Enter either the user’s SSN or SEID. The system generates the data for remaining fields.

    4. Click on the UNIT LOCATION number field. The system checks for any cases assigned to or being transferred to the user for all tax years.

    5. If there are outstanding cases, the system displays the message: "THERE IS STILL WORK ASSIGNED OR OUTSTANDING TRANSFERS. LOCATION CHANGE IS NOT ALLOWED."

    6. The system automatically displays the list of work assigned to the user.

    7. Before the Location change can be completed, all outstanding cases must be closed or reassigned.

    8. Delete the current UNIT LOCATION number and enter the new one.

    9. Update the ORG number to match the new UNIT LOCATION number.

    Note:

    Changes do not take effect until the next time the user logs on.

  3. The AUR Coordinator profile allows the user to be assigned two locations, primary location and unit location. The AUR Coordinator's unit location can be temporarily changed so the Coordinator can perform managerial/clerical functions for a specific unit.

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year Menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Enter the SEID of the AUR Coordinator in the SEID field.

    4. Click in the UNIT LOCATION number field. The system checks for any cases assigned to or being transferred to the user for all tax years.

    5. If there are outstanding cases, the system displays the message: "THERE IS STILL WORK ASSIGNED OR OUTSTANDING TRANSFERS. LOCATION CHANGE IS NOT ALLOWED."

      Note:

      Although the message indicates the location change is not allowed, if the user has the Coordinator profile, the system will allow the unit location to be changed.

    6. The system automatically displays the list of work assigned to the user.

    7. Close the report and continue with location change.

    8. Change the UNIT LOCATION number field to the specified unit.

    9. Press <F4> to commit.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

    Note:

    When managerial/clerical functions are finished, the UNIT LOCATION number field should be changed back to the same entry as in the PRIMARY LOCATION number field. If the location is not changed back the Coordinator is not able to accept any transferred cases.

History Tab – Researching User History
  1. Historical security data for any user can be researched by accessing the User History window as follows:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the HISTORY tab. A message displays stating a SEID must be entered. Acknowledge the message, the User History screen displays with the cursor in the SEID field.

    4. Enter the SEID of the user to be researched and click the Query button. All historical security data for the user displays.

    5. Press <F8> to exit.

  2. This screen is for information only, since no fields can be updated or changed.

    1. All current data for the user appears at the top half of the screen, including the date and time of the most recent change, and the SEID of the manager who made the change to the user’s security information. The LCT field indicates the campus number.

    2. The data under the heading HISTORICAL USER INFORMATION, is the prior security changes and are shown starting with the most current change, in reverse date order, and SEID of the manager who made the change. Scroll down for additional data.

  3. To query data for another user, click the CLEAR PAGE button and follow the steps in (1) above.

Group Tab
  1. User data for multiple users can be updated by accessing the Group Tab in the User Administration screen.

  2. To update the status code of multiple users in the same unit, the Update Group Status window can be used.

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the GROUP tab in User Administration. The Group Status window displays with the cursor in the REVIEW/UPDATE STATUS field.

      Note:

      The system generates the unit number of the manager taking the action in the UNIT field. If another unit number is desired, click in the UNIT field and enter the desired unit.

    4. Enter the status code of the user(s) whose status code is to be changed. If no status code is entered, information for every user in the unit displays.

    5. To update every user on the screen to the same status code, enter the new status code in the CHANGE STATUS TO field.

    6. To update the status code for only some of the users, enter the new status code for each user in the corresponding STATUS CODE field(s).

      Note:

      Whenever users are updated to, D status, the system removes the user completely from system data base A BEARS must also be done to remove the AUR application from the individual.

Audit Tab - Displaying Audit Trail Information
  1. The Audit tab displays actions taken by the user to change taxpayer data and is recorded in an Audit Trail table. SSNs accessed by the employee appear on the screen. In addition to the SSN field, the window displays the following fields:

    • TASK - All task codes used while working a case

      Note:

      For a complete list of Task Codes and their meanings, see Exhibit 1.4.19-8, AUR Task Codes.

      Note:

      When a row is highlighted, the hint text displays the description of the corresponding task code.

    • TASK DATE - the date and time of access

    • ACCESS IND - the Access indicator field displays a code indicating the request for an SSN was successfully completed. The codes and descriptions are shown below:

      Code Description
      A Own SSN Access Unsuccessful
      B Own SSN Access Successful
      C Employee SSN Access Unsuccessful
      D Employee SSN Access Successful
      E Other SSN Access Unsuccessful
      F Other SSN Access Successful
      G Spouse SSN Access Unsuccessful
      H Spouse SSN Access Successful

    • YEAR - the applicable AUR tax year

    • LOC, SEID, - the user’s ORG and Site.

  2. To access the Audit Trail data for a user:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the AUDIT tab in the User Administration screen. The Audit Trail Information screen displays with the cursor in the SEID field.

    4. Enter the user’s SEID.

    5. Press <Enter>. The cursor moves to the TY field and is defaulted to ALL.

    6. Enter the appropriate tax year or leave ALL.

    7. Enter Begin Query date and End Query Date

    8. Click on the Query button to display the records.

      Note:

      The screen displays all cases worked for the current and previous day.

Unit Tab - Updating the Unit Information Table (AUR Coordinator Only)
  1. The AUR Coordinator can add or delete units, or change certain information for existing units by accessing the UNIT tab on the User Administration screen.

  2. To add a new unit:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the UNIT tab. The Update Unit Information screen displays with the cursor in the 1st box under the UNIT number field. All existing units display.

    4. Click on the ADD A UNIT button. All the information for existing units is cleared and the cursor moves to the UNIT number field.

    5. Enter the following fields if not already populated by the system:

      In field Enter the following:
      UNIT new organization code
      MGR SEID 0000 or the SEID of the manager
      SHIFT "D" for Day or "S" for Swing
      UNIT NAME a Unit name
      PHONE NUMBER the manager's telephone number

    6. Press <F4> to commit.

      Note:

      The current location information for the SEID entered is generated into the LOC and LOCATION fields. This must be changed to the location for the new unit, along with other changes, as explained below.

    7. Click on the USER tab in the User Administration screen. Access the new manager’s account by entering the manager’s SEID.

      Note:

      It is important to make changes in the sequence listed in steps 8-13 below when making manager changes to a NEW unit.

    8. Click on the NEW LOC tab in the User Administration screen. Type the new location number in the "Enter a new location" field and type the name of the new location in the "Enter the name of location" field. Press <F4> to commit.

    9. Click on the UNIT LOCATION number field and change it to the new location. Press <Enter> to move to the ORG number field.

    10. Change the organization code of the manager to reflect the new unit number.

    11. Press <Enter> to move to the PROFILE CODE field and change the code if necessary.

    12. Press <Enter>. The Unit Information Table is updated with the correct information for the new unit.

    13. Press <F4> to commit.

    14. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. To delete a unit:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the UNIT tab. The Update Unit Information screen displays with the cursor in the 1st box under the UNIT number field. All existing units display.

    4. Click on the Unit Name to highlight the row.

    5. Click on the DELETE A UNIT button. A window displays showing the unit to be deleted.

    6. Enter "Y" in the Y/N field to acknowledge the correct unit in the window and press <Enter>. The message "All Records have been committed to the Data Base" displays. Acknowledge the message.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

  4. To change information in an existing unit:

    1. Click on the field to be changed.

      Exception:

      The LOC and LOCATION fields cannot be changed in this screen, use the User tab to change these fields.

    2. Make the necessary updates.

    3. Press <F4> to commit.

    4. Press <F8> to exit.

New Loc Tab (AUR Coordinator Only)
  1. The AUR Coordinator can create a New Location for new employees or to re-organize existing locations.

  2. To add a New Location:

    1. Select Security from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select user Administration from the drop-down menu. The User Administration window displays and is defaulted to the USER tab with the cursor in the SEID field.

    3. Click on the NEW LOC tab. The Create a New Location screen displays with the cursor in the Enter a new location field.

    4. Enter the new location in the ENTER A NEW LOCATION field.

    5. Enter the name of the location in the ENTER THE NAME OF THE LOCATION field.

      Note:

      The new location is created for all AUR tax years and the corresponding suspense batches.

    6. Press <F4> to commit.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

Profile Limits Tab
  1. The Profile Limits tab displays a list of Profile Codes, User Limit and User Limit Scope.

  2. Profile Codes 9000 and 9999 are able to view the information. However, only 9999 can edit information in the User Limit Field IRM 1.4.19.11.6, Profile Codes and Limitations.

Security Reports

  1. The AUR system generates several reports designed to help managers monitor system security issues. These reports are found under the Security menu option on the AUR main menu.

  2. There are two drop-down menu options found under the Security menu:

    • current access

    • Reports

Current Access
  1. When the current access option is selected a message displays in the Hint Text to let the user know what tax year they are accessing and whether they are in the production or training database.

Reports
  1. When the Reports option is selected from the Security menu (AUR main menu), a pull right menu displays with the following options:

    1. Profile code

    2. Aur user list

Profile Code Reports
  1. The Profile Code Report provides information regarding employee profile codes. There are three types of profile code reports. These reports are available to the AUR Coordinator and managers.

    1. The Unit report lists each employee in a unit by last name, first name, SSN, status, profile code, and profile date.

    2. The Section report lists, by profile code, the number of users in work and non-work status for a specific section.

    3. The Branch report lists, by profile code, the number of users in work and non-work status for the entire branch.

  2. To access the Profile Codes, report take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Security from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Profile code from the pull right menu.

    5. Select one of the menu options listed in (1) above. The selected Profile Code Report opens in a BOE window.

    6. Select File from the menu.

    7. Select Print from the drop-down menu.

    8. To exit the report, select File then Close from the menu options at the top of the report or use the "X" in the top right-hand corner of the report.

    9. Press <F8> to exit.

AUR User List
  1. The AUR User List is a listing of users on the AUR system. There are five types of AUR User lists. The entire list can be accessed and printed by the AUR Coordinator. Unit managers can print a list of their users.

    1. The SEID list provides a complete list of users in numerical order.

    2. The Unit list can be selected by either SEID (lists all the users in the unit in SEID order) or by Name (lists all the users in the unit in alphabetical order).

    3. The Name list provides a complete list of users in alphabetical order.

    4. The By Profile Code list user by their AUR Profile Code.

    5. The By Org Code list provides a complete list of AUR users by their AUR Organization Code.

    Note:

    The AUR User List generates in a BOE report, tabs at the bottom of the page allow the Coordinator/ Manager to view all five lists. This list can also be exported from BOE into PDF, Excel, CSV Archive and Text.

  2. To access the AUR User list take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Security from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reports from the drop-down menu.

    4. Select Aur user list from the pull right menu. The AUR user list window displays.

    5. Click in one of the report types (listed in (1) above).

    6. Click on Print. The selected AUR User List opens in a BOE window.

    7. Select File from the menu.

    8. Select Print from the drop-down menu.

    9. To exit the report use the "X" in the top right-hand corner of the report.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

AUR Coordinator

  1. The success of the AUR program in each center depends upon thorough coordination of all the affected functions, including Underreporter, Receipt and Control, Returns Files, Information Technology (IT), CPS, Machine Services, Planning and Analysis, and Compliance activities. Much of this is the responsibility of the AUR Coordinator. Since this program requires constant, careful monitoring, each AUR site ensures all responsible functions are aware of the processing activities and timeframes of the other affected functions. A designated individual monitors the processing to ensure it is progressing per the schedule reflected on the program planning documents. Any subsequent revisions to the schedule must be sent to the appropriate AUR Headquarters office.

  2. In addition, the AUR Coordinator is responsible for:

    • Setting Notice Letter Mailout dates and volumes

    • Letter paragraphs

    • Setting Batch and Control Parameters

    • AUR Balancing and Control

    • Setting Extract Reorder Dates

    • Monitoring the runs to ensure extract accuracy

Coordinator Actions Needed For Tax Year Startup

  1. At the beginning of each tax year there are certain actions the AUR Coordinator must do to ensure a smooth startup. Prior to the startup of a new tax year, AUR HQ Analyst provides an email to the Coordinators outlining specific actions the Coordinator needs to take such as:

    • CP 2000 auto assess end date.

    • Stat auto assess end date.

    • Last day to Input CP 2501.

    • Last day to Input CP 2000.

    • Initial starts

      Note:

      If the volume of initial starts is not known at the time the startup information is sent, enter the volume from the previous year.

  2. In addition to the above actions, additional information/reminders are provided such as:

    • Verify service center information is correct; including the address.

      Note:

      If your site's payments go to a different service center, include the mailing address of that service center.

    • Verify Action 61 fields are set, per IRM 1.4.19 and local preference in both the assigned unit and batch finished fields.

Coordinator Actions Needed For Tax Year Closeout/Shutdown

  1. At the end of each tax year there are certain actions the AUR Coordinator must do to ensure a clean closeout of the tax year. Prior to the closeout of a tax year, AUR HQ Analyst provides an email providing information the Coordinator need to consider.

  2. The closeout email provides the target date for shutdown and reminds the AUR Coordinator, cases in special programs (bankruptcy and ID theft), will need to be closed off the AUR system and worked manually.

  3. The Coordinator is responsible for reviewing the following reports/listings to identify inventory requiring attention:

    • Inventory Report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.2

    • RLS Batch Status Report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.4.22

    • Open Case Listing, see IRM 1.4.19.9.5.7

    • Disassembled/Age Batch Report, see IRM 1.4.19.9.4.3

    • Notice/Letter Suspense Listing, see IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.7

    • Bankruptcy Status, see IRM 1.4.19.9.6.3

    • Statute Listing, see IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.9

    • Open Transfer Listing, see IRM 1.4.19.9.5.11.5

    Note:

    The above listed reports should be reviewed in accordance to the specific IRM instructions for each report.

  4. In addition to the above reports the Coordinator should

    • Look at Batch history for each Extract to identify if any volume remains

      Note:

      If volume remains, pull a Seq-num-ssn listing to identify the specific cases remaining in the extract.

    • Check reorder dates to ensure all cases were reordered

AUR Coordinator Screens

  1. Several parameters must be input by the AUR Coordinator (or rolled-over) prior to beginning each tax year. These parameters dictate several actions that take place in the system.

  2. To access the AUR Coordinator window, select aUr coord from the AUR main menu. A drop-down menu displays the following:

    • Notice dates

    • Batch parameter

    • Ctrl parameter

    • Ltr parameter

    • loc letTer para

    • Reorder dates

    • Disaster zip cd

    • rUn controls

  3. The descriptions of the individual menu options in the following subsections provide more specific information.

Notice Mailout Dates
  1. The Notice Mailout Date window is used to set volumes for mailout of AUR notices. It is the responsibility of the AUR Coordinator to ensure the correct volumes are input in the notice mailout window. It may be necessary to update or change the volumes throughout the year.

  2. The AUR system assigns a mailout date to each case with a notice PC when the batch is updated to "RB" status.

  3. Notice dates and Notice Upload dates are systemically assigned and cannot be changed. The mailout volume is input by the AUR Coordinator and must be maintained. The window contains the following fields:

    1. Notice Upload Date

    2. CP 2501 - Notice Date

    3. CP 2501 - Weekly Volume

    4. CP 2501 - Release Volume

    5. CP 2000 - Notice Date

    6. CP 2000 - Weekly Volume

    7. CP 2000 - Release Volume

    8. CP 2000 Auto Notice - Notice Date

    9. CP 2000 Auto Notice - Weekly Volume

    10. CP 2000 Auto Notice - Release Volume

    11. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - Notice Date

    12. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - Weekly Volume

    13. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - Released Volume

    14. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - BT 67 Volume

    15. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - BT 87 Volume

    16. Recomp/Amended/PC57, 95 - MI Reserve

    17. Stat - Notice Date

    18. Stat - Weekly Volume

    19. Stat - Release Volume

    20. TDC Count

  4. To access the Notice Mailout Dates window:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select the Notice dates from the drop-down menu. The Notice Dates Mailout window displays with the cursor in the first box in the NOTICE UPLOAD DATE field.

    4. Use <Enter> or <Tab> to advance the cursor.

    5. Enter the correct volume in the appropriate field(s).

    6. Press <F4> to commit.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

    Note:

    All of the notice dates can be printed from the Notice Mailout Dates Listing available from the Reports menu.

  5. Notice Upload dates are Saturdays and display in MM/DD/YYYY format. If the Notice upload dates have already passed they do not display.

  6. Notice volumes for CP 2000 and Recomp/Amended notices cannot be changed if within two weeks of the Notice Upload Date, due to the time needed for the interest calculations.

  7. CP 2000 notices cannot be generated during the Master File dead cycles (interest computations cannot be downloaded). However, CP 2501, CP 2000 Recomp/Amended and Stat Notices can be generated during the dead cycles as no Master File interest computation is required.

    Note:

    Headquarters provides notice dates where the volume of notices should be set to zero (0) for dead cycles and End of Year (EOY) processing.

    Note:

    An original CP 2000 request posts a PC 09 to request an interest computation from Master File.

  8. Once the notice volume for a specific notice date has been exceeded, any additional notice volume is assigned (rolled over) to the next available notice date.

    Note:

    When notices are rolled over to a future date, address updates are taken into consideration.

  9. Mailout volumes include cases with notice PCs from Employee BTs 90 and 91.

  10. Mailout volumes do not include cases from Partially Agreed BT 67 and 87.

  11. The Released Volume column for Recomp/Amended/PC 57, 95 includes volumes from BT 67 and 87. The Batch Type 67 and 87 columns display the volume of notices when the batch is updated to "AB" (Associated Batch) Status.

  12. TDC Count establishes the TDC indicator on notices to include the TDC invitation. The volume is input by the AUR Coordinator and must be maintained. Coordinators will have a one week window to input this volume (3 weeks prior to Notice Date). Coordinator can add to the count but can’t reduce it once committed.

Batch Parameters
  1. The AUR Coordinator is required to establish the operating parameters used for batch building. The following is set by the Coordinator for each batch type:

    • Maximum batch count

    • Maximum work unit count

    • Default location

  2. Batch types are divided into three different categories.

    1. User Built (UB) - UB batches need to have the Maximum Batch Count, Maximum Work Unit Count, and Default location set.

    2. System Suspense (SS) - SS batches can only have the default location changed.

    3. Unit Suspense (US) - US batches are system defined and cannot be changed.

  3. Maximum Batch Count for suspense batches is limited to 9,999 cases in a batch. The Maximum Batch Count for any other batch type is 999. The Maximum Work Unit count is limited to 99 cases.

  4. The default location input must match a location number previously established by IT.

  5. To access the Batch Parameter screen take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select the Batch parameter from the drop-down menu. The Update Batch Parameter screen displays with the cursor in the first box in the MAXIMUM BATCH COUNT field.

    4. Use <Enter> or <Tab> to advance the cursor.

    5. Enter the correct volume in the appropriate field(s).

    6. Press <F4> to commit.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

  6. Minimum batch parameters are set by HQ Policy. Batch building will not allow the batch to be closed until the minimum amount has been met. An error message will display when the volume count hasn’t been met." ERROR: MINIMUM BATCH SIZE NOT REACHED" .

Control Parameters
  1. The AUR Coordinator is responsible for ensuring control parameters are verified for the start-up of each new tax year and updated as appropriate. The fields and their descriptions are listed in (3) - (30) below.

  2. To access the Control parameter screen take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select the Ctrl parameter from the drop-down menu. The Update Control Parameter screen displays with the cursor in the CONTROL RELEASE LOCATION field.

    4. Use <Enter> or <Tab> to advance the cursor.

    5. Make changes as needed to the appropriate field(s). See (3) - (30) below for description of each field.

    6. Press <F4> to commit.

    7. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. The CONTROL RELEASE LOCATION is the location where batches and released unit suspense cases are assigned when the status is updated to "BF" .

    Note:

    This field should always be set to "RLS" .

  4. The RECEIVER EMPLOYEE NUMBER is used for automated return requests, transcript requests. The number is broken down into three components.

    • The first two digits are the campus code

    • The second three digits are the location number

    • The last five digits identify a specific employee or generic unit number

  5. The NAME/ADDRESS/EMPLOYEE field is used when the AUR System sends address updates to ECC-MTB and letters to Correspondex. The number is broken down into three components.

    • The first two digits are the campus code

    • The second three digits are the location number

    • The last five digits identify a specific employee or generic unit number

  6. The CP 2000 AUTO ASSESS END DATE field indicates when AUR CP 2000 auto assessments are suspended for a given tax year. This date is set to ensure all auto assessments are processed in time to meet the statute expiration date. PC 67 and IPC RN cases must have a date no later than February 28, of the Statute year.

  7. The STAT AUTO ASSESS ENDING DATE field indicates when AUR Stat auto assessments are suspended for a given tax year. This date is set to ensure all auto assessments are processed in time to meet the statute expiration date. PC 87, 90 or IPC SR must have a date no later than June 30, of the Statute year. An automatic assessment record is always created for cases closed with PC 91, 92, or 93.

  8. LAST DAY TO INPUT CP 2501 field indicates when CP 2501 notices should stop being generated for a given tax year. This date is set to ensure no CP 2501 notices are generated too late to complete processing the tax year before the statute expires.

  9. LAST DAY TO INPUT CP 2000 field indicates when CP 2000 notices should stop being generated for a given tax year. The date is set to ensure no CP 2000 notices are generated too late to complete processing before the statute expires.

  10. The EMPLOYEE CASE SEID is used when an employee case is identified during regular processing. The system displays a message to transfer the case to the Employee Case SEID. The employee must be in "P" status.

  11. The AGE NUMBER reflects the number of days of aging for the Aged Response Batch Summary report.

  12. The ESTAB MAXIMUM REMARKS field is used to indicate the maximum number of characters (including spaces) the user can enter in the REMARKS field on the Research screen.

  13. The MAXIMUM CHECK DATE COUNT field limits the number of cases displayed within a particular notice date after No Response cases have been built. This prevents the system from displaying thousands of cases on a notice date that was not purged.

  14. MAXIMUM LABEL COUNT limits the number of labels generated by one request.

  15. MAXIMUM REPORT COUNT limits the number of SSNs that can be viewed or printed when accessing batch listings. Recommended volume of 9,999.

  16. DUT PARAGRAPH NUMBER is a designated paragraph sent to Taxpayers on how to respond using the Document Upload Tool (DUT).

  17. DUT START DATE is the date the paragraph will appear on the notice.

  18. WAIVER LOCATION NAME is the campus name displayed in the symbols box in the upper right corner of Form 5564, Notice of Deficiency-Waiver. Up to 13 characters may be entered.

  19. WAIVER STOP CODE is the mail stop displayed in the symbols box in the upper right corner of Form 5564. Up to 13 characters may be entered.

  20. ACTION 61 AGE DAYS is the number of days after the IRS received date a Letter 4314-C is mailed to the taxpayer. The system automatically generates and processes Letter 4314-C three to five days before the letter date. The three to five day timeframe allows for processing and printing of the letters. The system default for this field is 30.

    Example:

    If the number of days entered is 30, the system generates and processes the letters on the 25th - 27th day after the IRS received date.

  21. ACTION 61 RESPONSE DAYS is the number of days the taxpayer will be contacted again by IRS. The system default for this field is 30. HQ suggests setting the number of days to 60 to allow ample time to work responses.

  22. ACTION 61 ASSIGNED UNIT is used to automatically generate Letter 4314-C on cases meeting ACTION 61 AGED DAYS criteria for BTs 41, 44, 52, 53, 58, 72, 74, and 99 in "AU" status.

    Caution:

    If this field is blank, a Letter 4314-C does NOT automatically generate.

  23. ACTION 61 BATCH FINISHED is used to automatically generate Letter 4314-C on cases meeting ACTION 61 AGED DAYS criteria for BT 41, 44, 52, 53, 58, 72, 74, 81 and 98 in "BF" status.

    Caution:

    If this field is blank, Letter 4314-C does NOT automatically generate.

    Note:

    Letter 4314-C generates with paragraphs "A" and "S"

    .

  24. CP 2005/CP 2006 ADD DAYS is the number of days after batch disassembly date, the automated acknowledgement and/or no change letters are generated. This should be set to 7 days.

  25. PLANNED INVENTORY is the total number of cases your campus is working for the tax year. This information is necessary for the MISTLE report to calculate correctly.

    Reminder:

    Changes to inventory must be input in order for the Mistle to reflect accurate information.

  26. The following fields relate to the individual campus(es). Enter the appropriate information for your campus:

    1. SERVICE CENTER CODE is the two-digit code for the campus.

    2. SERVICE CENTER NAME

    3. ABBR SERVICE CENTER NAME

    4. RETURN STREET ADDRESS

    5. RETURN CITY

    6. RETURN STATE CODE - Select <F6> for a listing of valid state codes.

    7. RETURN ZIP CODE

  27. The following fields are only used when payments must be processed at another campus due to Submission Processing ramp-down. Enter the appropriate information for your campus, otherwise leave these fields blank:

    1. STREET ADDR-RESP WITH PAYMENT

    2. CITY-RESP WITH PAYMENT

    3. STATE CODE-RESP WITH PAYMENT - Select <F6> for a listing of valid state codes.

    4. ZIP CODE-RESP WITH PAYMENT

  28. SUSPENSE INDICATOR indicates one copy of the letter is kept in a manual suspense file. Locally defined indicators A-Z or blank are used to identify suspense files. This must be coordinated locally with the Correspondex Coordinator.

  29. SUSPENSE UNIT EMPLOYEE NAME is the name of the employee designated to receive Form 5703, IDRS Letter Enclosure, with attachments to be associated with the outgoing Correspondence. Each campus decides whether or not to designate an employee name for this field.

  30. SUSPENSE UNIT MAIL STOP NUMBER is the mail stop number in the campus where Form 5703 with attachments is routed.

  31. The TRS90 data fields in UPDATE CONTROL PARAMETERS represent an additional security feature for ordering various tax account transcripts and DLNs on the AUR system. Logins and passwords must be requested from the ECC-MTB using BEARS. The TRS90 data must be updated for ALL available tax years as the program goes to the oldest running tax year to get the TRS90 user information:

    1. TRS90 ID is the seven-character Site-ID and Organization combination login, provided by ECC-MTB using the BEARS process. Alpha characters must be capitalized.

    2. TRS90 ACCESS CODE is the eight-digit password, provided by ECC-MTB using the BEARS process. A new password must be requested every 360 days.

    3. ACCESS CODE START DATE is the expiration date provided by ECC-MTB in MMDDYYYY format and must be updated every 360 days.

  32. MAXIMUM SCREENING BATCH COUNT limits the number of SSNs that can be built to a batch to 999.

  33. MAXIMUM RESPONSE BATCH COUNT limits the number of SSNs that can be built to a batch to 999.

Update Letter Parameters
  1. Every type of notice and letter sent must contain contact information for your site. This information is entered in the Update Letter Parameters window. All entries must be carefully reviewed as this information displays on the notices and letters exactly as input.

    Note:

    Notices and letters include the CP notices (CP 2501, CP 2000, CP 2005 and CP 2006), Stat notices and all correspondex letters (Letter 2626-C, Letter 4314-C, etc.).

  2. To access/update the Letter Parameter Screen take the following action:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Ltr parameter from the drop-down menu. The Letter Parameter Screen displays with the cursor in the first FORM LETTER field.

    4. Enter the type of notice or letter (CP 2000, RECOMP, STAT, CP 2005, CP 2006, Letter 4314-C), in the FORM LETTER field.

    5. Enter a "Y" in the LTR IND - for Correspondex (CRX) letters. For CP and Stat notices, leave the field blank.

    6. Enter a two-character alpha code from IDRS Correspondex if a signature applies in the SIG CD field.

      Note:

      If personnel changes occur verify the signature on SERP (http://serp.enterprise.irs.gov) under the Who/Where tab, Correspondence Signature Code or using IDRS Command Code (CC) MESSG.

    7. Enter the signature name corresponding to the Laser Signature Code in the SIG. LINE 1 field.

      Note:

      Do not use first names on the signature line. Either use "Director/Operation Manager" or Mr., Mrs., Miss, or Ms. LAST name.

    8. Enter the signature title corresponding to the Laser Signature Code in the SIG. LINE 2 field.

    9. Enter additional title information for the Laser Signature Code, if applicable, in the SIG. LINE 3 field.

    10. Enter the designated contact person’s name in the CONTACT NAME field, otherwise leave the field blank and the system defaults to the AUR user Information.

    11. Enter the designated beginning and ending hours of telephone service, including AM and PM, in the HOURS field, otherwise leave the field blank and the system defaults to the AUR User Information.

      Note:

      TEs (AUR users) cannot override the CONTACT NAME and HOURS fields when creating letters. If the contact information needs to be changed the Paragraph must be deleted and the correct Contact information included in a Special Paragraph.

    12. Leave the CONTACT IND field blank for the designated CONTACT NAME from Step 9 above. Enter a "Y" for AUR User Information.

      Note:

      If you want a letter to automatically fill in with the TE's name, contact hours and phone number, you must put a "Y" in the "CONTACT IND" field for each letter and leave the rest of the fields (contact name, phone numbers and hours) blank.

    13. Enter the appropriate contact type(s) and corresponding phone number(s) in the CONTACT TYPE 1, CONTACT TYPE 2, CONTACT TYPE 3 and PHONE field(s).

    14. Repeat steps 4 - 14 above for each notice/letter.

    15. Press <F4> to commit.

    16. Press<F8> to exit.

  3. To enter manual letter numbers:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Ltr parameter from the drop-down menu. The Letter Parameter Screen displays with the cursor in the first FORM LETTER field.

    4. Click in the FORM LETTER field of the Manual Letter section.

    5. Enter or edit all desired manual letter numbers. Each entry can be up to six characters in length. Press <Enter> after each entry.

    6. When all desired manual letter numbers have been entered, press <F4> to commit.

    7. Press<F8> to exit.

  4. To add a new letter to the Update Letter Parameter:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Ltr parameter from the drop-down menu.

    4. Place the cursor on the letter you want the new letter to follow.

    5. Press <F2>. A blank new letter appears on the screen and the cursor moves to the Form Letter Field.

    6. Fill in the information on the required lines per (2) above.

      Note:

      The LTR IND box is either blank or has a "Y" in it. Enter/verify the "Y" is in the box. The "Y" must be present in order for the AUR users to be able to select the letter and for the letter to appear in the "Update Local Letter Paras" screen. The new letter appears at the very end of the list.

Local Correspondex Letter Paragraphs
  1. The AUR Coordinator has the ability to input up to 20 local paragraphs for each Correspondex letter on the AUR system. These paragraphs are numbered 75 through 94. TEs can select paragraphs as either an "OPEN Paragraph" or a "Floating Paragraph" .

  2. To create a new paragraph:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select loc leTter para from the drop-down menu. The Update Local Letter Paras window displays with the cursor in the NUM field.

    4. Place the cursor in the LETTER field and then use the arrow keys to find the specific letter.

    5. Click on the blank NUM field and press <F2> to access the Create/Edit Local Letter Paragraph window.

    6. Type in the paragraph text.

    7. Click the Spellcheck button and make corrections as needed.

    8. Click on the OK button.

    9. Type in the title of the paragraph.

      Note:

      The title of the paragraph automatically displays in all capital letters and is not included on the letter.

    10. Press <F4> to commit.

  3. To edit an existing paragraph:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select loc leTter para from the drop-down menu. The Update Local Letter Paras window displays with the cursor in the first box of the NUM field.

    4. Place your cursor in the NUM field of the paragraph to be edited.

    5. Press <CTRL E> to display the Create/ Edit Local Letter Paragraph window. The cursor appears at the beginning of the existing text.

    6. Make the changes and then click the Spellcheck button and make corrections as needed.

    7. Click on the OK button.

    8. Press <F4> to commit the changes.

    9. Press <CTRL E> again to ensure the paragraph is correctly formatted.

    Note:

    Once a paragraph is created it cannot be deleted. If the paragraph is no longer needed, type "RESERVED" in the paragraph body and title.

  4. Sometimes a "gap" appears in the paragraph text, after it has been committed. This "gap" is the result of the way the window reads a cut-off point on the line. To correct this, take the following steps:

    1. Place the cursor at the end (extreme right) of the line immediately above the line where the "gap" starts.

    2. Press <Enter> to create a "hard break" .

    3. When the cursor goes to the next line it should have moved the first word over one space.

    4. Use <Delete> to remove the space at the beginning of the "gap" line. Move the cursor to the end of the line and use <Delete> to remove the "gap" spaces.

    5. Click on the Spellcheck button.

    6. Click on the OK button.

    7. Press <F4> to commit.

    8. Press <CTRL E> again to ensure the paragraph is correctly formatted.

    9. Repeat the above steps until all the "gaps" are removed.

Update Reorder Date
  1. The Update Reorder Dates window is used to maintain the reorder dates and triggers the system to reorder returns in the extract batches and -L Freeze cases. Ensure the original reorder date allows sufficient time for the returns to be received from the Federal Records Centers.

  2. AUR Coordinators should monitor the volume of cases in each extract not built to a screening batch and adjust the reorder date accordingly. When the Batch History table shows a downloaded extract of less than 10 percent in "RT" status the reorder date should be set or made earlier to allow the Charge-Outs to be reordered.

    Note:

    The AUR Coordinator should ensure all Charge-Out documents received from the FRC’s are built by the clerical staff before changing the reorder date.

  3. To enter/update the reorder dates:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Reorder dates from the drop-down menu. The Update Reorder Dates window displays with the cursor in the first position of the REORDER DATE field.

    4. Enter the applicable reorder date.

    5. Press <Enter>. The cursor moves to the next position in the REORDER DATE field.

      Note:

      The reorder date for the first extract must be at least 30 days beyond the date the extract was downloaded. Each subsequent extract must have a reorder date"greater than or equal to" the previous extract. If an extract has been downloaded, the reorder date must be entered. The Extract 90 reorder date must be changed each time a new reorder date is input, unless the Extract 90 reorder date is already greater than or equal to the latest reorder date for Extracts 01-27.

    6. When all reorder dates have been entered, press <F4> to commit, the cursor moves to the -L FREEZE DATE field.

      Note:

      The reorder date for -L Freeze cases must be changed each time a new reorder date is input, unless the -L Freeze reorder date is already greater than or equal to the latest reorder date for Extracts 01-27 or BT 90.

    7. Enter or verify the reorder date for -L Freeze cases. Press <F4> to commit.

      Note:

      The charge-outs for reordered returns are generated at the campus where the original return was filed.

    8. Press <F8> to exit.

Disaster Case Processing
  1. The AUR system has the ability to identify cases by Disaster zip code.

  2. BT 93 is designated for disaster case processing and actions.

  3. The IRS may grant disaster relief based on FEMA declarations of disaster/emergency areas. IRS Disaster Relief memos are available on Servicewide Electronic Research Portal (SERP), http://serp.enterprise.irs.gov, and are accessed under the Who/Where option as Disaster Declarations/FEMA by tax year.

  4. AUR HQ Policy is informed by the Disaster Assistance Emergency Relief Program of the disaster. HQ enters the FEMA number, type of disaster and zip codes into the AUR system and notifies the sites of the disaster.

AUR Runs
  1. Additional information on Run consideration is located in the current year AUR Processing Guide. This document is available through the IT staff.

  2. It is important the runs are balanced timely. Balancing of runs can detect problems which are easier to correct when identified early. Early detection and correction of problems maintains the integrity of the database. To access the AUR Run Controls take the following actions:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select aUr coord from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select rUn controls. The AUR Run Control screen displays.

    4. Select one of the following options: Daily, Weekly, Weekend, Other or All.

      Note:

      "Any" option selected allows you to view the current week and history information.

    5. Select the run number(s) you wish to access by clicking in the Log or History boxes or both.

      Note:

      You can also use the SELECT ALL option if you want to view all of the runs. The CLEAR ALL button can be used to deselect all the options.

      Note:

      If both boxes are selected, two files will open, one for the current information and one for the history. The reports display in ascending run date order.

    6. Click on the PRINT SELECTED ITEMS option, the file(s) you requested will open in a separate window. To print these files:

    7. Select File from the menu.

    8. Select Print from the drop-down menu.

    9. To exit the report, select File then Close from the menu options at the top of the report or use the "X" in the top right-hand corner of the report.

      Note:

      Multiple reports display on separate tabs, you may want to close each tab separately.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

  3. The AUR Coordinator should use the following instructions each week to balance.

    AUR RUN DESCRIPTION BALANCE and CONTROL
    AURX001 Download IRP - The data in this run is provided from ECC-MTB via File Transfer Protocol (FTP) on the URP45 and loads the Underreporter Transcript information to the AUR database. This is run for every extract.
    1. Match the total from file “PDIAW.IURP4528.F0XXXX.U20XXXX” to Total Records Read line E.

    2. Match the volume of PCs 03, 03K, 06 and 06K on the PC Status Report to the total Case Majors Processed.

      Note:

      If the volume on AURX001 and PCs 03, 03K, 06 and 06K do not match, contact the SA.

    3. Match (approximate) Total Records Processed on AURX033. to the total Case Majors Processed.

    4. Match the volume scheduled for the extract to the volume on AURX001.

    AURX003 Download TIF - This run accepts file WTU1015 as input and contains the Taxpayer Information File (TIF). This run contains the TIF for each extract and weekly TIF updates. Verify all tax years are run weekly.

    Exception:

    The X003 is not run during dead cycles.

    AURX005 Download RTF - The data is provided from ECC-MTB via FTP on the URP65 and contains the Return Transaction File (RTF) or transcription lines from the taxpayer’s return when originally processed and subsequent actions. For every AURX001 there is a corresponding AURX005.
    1. Match the total from file “PDIAW.IURP6528.F01128.U20XXXX” to Total RTF Records Read line B.

    2. Match the Total Case Majors Processed on AURX001 to the Total RTF Cases Inserted.

    SSNs are displayed where Major/Minor information was not downloaded into the system.

    Note:

    Inventory cuts may affect volume.

    AURX006 Download TRDB - This is run for every extract and loads the electronic return information to the AUR database. Ensure the run is successful - there is no balance or control for this run.

    Note:

    Once the virtual batches display on the Batch Inventory Report, check to see if the TRDB information is present. If the message "NO TRDB data present" displays, contact HQ to verify the AURX006 has been run for the extract.

    AURX007 Download Payer Agent - This is a weekly run, which selects records from the Payer Agent table and updates the system with the new Payer Agent information. This is run at the Ogden site for all sites.
    AURX013 Download Certified Mail Number IAP file listing of CNML (from USPS). This is run at the Ogden site for all sites.
    AURX015 Download Employee Cases - This program downloads employee SSNs and spouse SSNs to the IRS EMPLOYEE table. The data is used to update previously unidentified employee cases in AURX059. The AURX015 connects to all tax years. This is run at the Ogden site for all sites.
    AURX017 Download POA - This downloads Power of Attorney addresses into the AUR database from the 16093 run.
    1. Verify the run is completed weekly for the current tax year.

      Note:

      Only use the latest Tax Year X017 report to balance.

    2. Total records inserted in AURX017 should be equal to or less than the REVIEW data, line B total POA of AURX020. Also AURX021 and AURX022 XML generation, REVIEW processing, line B POAs.

    AURX019 Download Interest - This program updates the CP 2000 trans and CP 2000 history tables with interest as determined by the UR SCRS runs.
    1. Match the REVIEW processing, NOTICE LETTER MAILOUT count on AURX022 to the Total Records Processed line B.

    2. Verify clerical has printed the Reject List.

    3. Match the volume of rejects on the AUR Reject Listing to the Total Interest Rejects line D.

    AURX020 Build CP 2501 Record - This run creates the AURX02020 for input to AURX080220. This contains the data used to create the CP 2501. This run is performed on cases with a CP 2501 PC after the system has disassembled the batch and is run weekly.
    1. Match the sum of PC 30, 30K, A0 and 3AK on the PC Status Listing to the Review Notice Mailout count.

      Note:

      For TY 16 and subsequent only PC 30 and A0 will be used.

    2. Match the Notice count received and processed on the AURX080125 to the Review Notice Mailout count.

      Note:

      AURX080125 only updates if notices are being generated.

    AURX021 Build Stat Records - This run creates the AURX02120 for input to AURX082125 which contains Stat Notice data on cases with Stat PC 75 after the system has disassembled the batch.
    1. Match the Notice Count received and processed on the AURX081125 to the Total Notice Count (Review processing).

      Note:

      AURX081125 only updates if notices are being generated.

    2. Match the sum of PC 75, 75K, 7A and 7AK on the PC Status Listing to the REVIEW processing, NOTICE LETTER MAILOUT count.

    AURX022 Build CP 2000 Records - This run creates file AURX02220 for input to the AURX082220. This run is performed on cases with a CP 2000 PC after the system has disassembled the batch. Match Total Records Processed on the AURX019 to the Notice Letter Mailout count.
    AURX023 Upload POA Key - This program creates a file of Power of Attorney keys from the 16093 run. These keys are used to get updated POA information from Masterfile.
    1. Verify run weekly for the most current tax year.

    2. Match AURX017 total records in "1706511" to the total records processed.

    AURX024 Build AC Record (CP 2005 closure and CP 2006 transfer)
    1. Verify run weekly.

    2. Compare total Acknowledgement Letters (CP 2006 ) processed in AURX024 to the sum of PCs: 35, 35K, 36, 36K, 38, 38K, 62, 62K, 63, 63K, 64, 64K, 82, 82K, 83, 83K, 85 and 85K from the PC Status Report.

    3. Compare the Total Closure Letters (CP 2005) processed in AURX024 to the sum of PCs: 39, 39K, 47, 47K, 48, 48K, 51, 51K, 69, 69K, 70, 70K, 73, 73k, 74, 74K, 89, 89K, 91, 91K, 93 and 93K from the PC Status Report.

      Note:

      For TY 2016 and subsequent, Process Codes with "K" have been removed.

    AURX025 Check SADA - This program creates a file of Spouses at Different Address requests. These requests are input into URX34 and used to get new information about spouses with different addresses from the NAP. Verify run weekly.
    AURX026 Upload Correspondex - This program identifies new record values to request the creation of IDRS letters to be mailed. Verify run daily.
    This process is only run for the current tax year and merges correspondex for all tax years.
    AURX028 Build Research Request - This run creates a file for input to TRS90. It contains requests for tax returns or transcripts via TE request on AUR or automatic system reorder. This run is performed daily. Verify run daily.
    AURX029 Upload Pending Interest - This is an FTP process for input into URX23. The file contains data necessary to compute CP 2000 interest.
    1. Verify run weekly.

    2. Match Review process NOTICE LETTER MAILOUT count from the AURX022 plus total rejects from the AUR Reject Listing to the Total Records Processed.

    3. Match the Total Records Read on the AURX019 to the Total Records Processed.

    AURX030 Upload Address Change/Assessments - This daily run creates a file of assessments and address change information. It is uploaded to EOD10, which updates IDRS and Master File.
    • Verify run daily.

    • Address changes and Assessments are uploaded on the day after batches are disassembled (for example, Monday address changes/assessments display on Tuesday’s AURX030 run. Friday's display on the following Monday or on Tuesday if Monday is a holiday).

    • This program is only run for the current tax year and merges address changes and assessments for all tax years.

    Note:

    Assessment PCs are uploaded the previous week.

    AURX032 Upload PC - This program creates a file for input to URX53. The file can contain more than one set of PC data for each SSN. The PC Status Listing and MISTLE report are created from this data.
    1. Verify run weekly for the most current tax year.

    2. Match the Service Center Total PCs on the PC Status Listing to the Total Records Written to Output.

    AURX033 Upload TRDB Request (with AURX089) ELF and MEF AURX089 currently prints charge-outs, but eventually will not.
    1. Verify run after each extract.

    2. Verify Chargeouts were printed and sent to the FRC’s

    AURX034 Upload Third-Party - The output file is transmitted to ECC-MTB via FTP. This run connects all tax years and merges all Third-Party Contacts. This is run at the Ogden site for all sites.
    AURX039 Upload State Disclosure - This run contains the state disclosure data, which is sent to the state tax agencies. The information is generated by AURX049. This upload is run monthly. At the end of each quarter, three months of data is merged before being forwarded. Verify run monthly, normal run is the last Sunday of the month.
    AURX041 Part Agreed Notices - This run provides the functions necessary to upload CP notice (IPC RN/SR) information from BT 67 and/or BT 87 in "AB" status. The notice dates are systemically uploaded to create CP notices for the Taxpayer or to only update the new CP information on the database and not generate a notice. N/A
    AURX043 Auto Notice - This run produces cases for Extracts 27 and 28. Total Subfile J Cases Processed should approximate the sum of AGN cases.
    AURX044 Auto Batching - This run batches ELF extract after AURX003 and Auto Notices after AURX043. This program is run after every extract.
    AURX046 Disassemble Batches - This run provides the functions necessary to disassemble a batch in "RB" status. Closure, Fraud, Research, Wrong Pull, Assessments, Notice/Letter cases are systemically or clerically built into a new batch, based on PC/IPC. This program is run daily.
    AURX047 Disassemble Employee Batches - This run provides the functions necessary to disassemble employee cases in BTs 91 and 92. N/A
    AURX049 Create Disclosure Trans - this process prepares disclosure data from CP 2000 notices for states with disclosure agreements. If the case state code is for a participating state and the total adjustment amount is equal to or greater than the state tolerance level, processing continues, if not, the case is bypassed. IRs from foreign income cannot be disclosed to states - these are deleted from the total adjustment amount. N/A
    AURX057 Suspense Aging - This run performs functions necessary to perform aging processing. N/A
    AURX058 Employee Suspense Aging - This run performs functions necessary to perform employee aging processing. N/A
    AURX059 Update (Employee) Case - This module checks all primary and secondary SSNs against SSNs in IRS EMPLOYEE. The data is used to update previously unidentified employee cases in AURX059. AURX059 should be run only when AURX001 and/or AURX015 are run.
    AURX063 Auto Purge - This run batches aged cases from major suspense batches. Cases not successfully aged, remain in suspense until built into the correct batch.

    Note:

    AURX063 is run after AURX057 is successfully run.

    Batches are systemically created and systemically placed into AB status.
    • Cases in suspense batches 40 and 47 are batched to BT49.

    • Cases in suspense batches 50, 55 and 60 are batched to BT59.

    • Cases in suspense batch 70 are batched to BT79.

    AURX075 Produce Interim Response Letters - This process identifies and creates a record for cases meeting the criteria for automatic generation of a Letter 4314-C. Verify program is run daily.
    AURX080120 X-Produce CP 2501 - print - This run produces CP 2501 notices for print.
    1. Verify run weekly.

      Note:

      AURX080120 only updates if notices are being generated.

    2. Match the Number of Initial Contact Notice Majors to the prior weeks total of PCs 30, 30K, 3A, and 3AK on the PC Status Listing.

    3. Match the volume of notices received and successfully processed to the volume of Total Notices (print section) on the AURX020.

    AURX081120 X-Produce Stat - print - This run produces Stat notices for print.
    1. Verify run weekly.

      Note:

      AURX081120 only updates if notices are being generated.

    2. Match the volume of notices received and successfully processed to the volume of Total Notices (print section) on the AURX021.

    AURX082120 X-Produce CP 2000 - print - This run produces CP 2000 notices for print.
    1. Verify run weekly.

      Note:

      AURX082120 only updates if notices are being generated.

    2. Match the volume of notices received and successfully processed to the volume of Total Notices (print section) on the AURX022.

    AURX084 Produce Suspense Labels - This run selects SSN and label data to produce bar-coded labels/folders for association with cases.

    Note:

    The current AUR Tax year reflects all open tax year information.

    • Provides CP 2501 Labels volume.

    • Provides the volume of CP 2000 Labels.

    • Provides the volume of Stat Labels.

    AURX088 Produce Acknowledgement / Closure Letter - This run produces acknowledgement and closure letters (CP 2005 and CP 2006).
    1. Verify run weekly.

    2. Match the volume of Notices successfully received and processed in AURX088 to AURX024 "Total" in the "Total by Recipient" section.

    Note:

    See Exhibit 1.4.19-5, Notice Generation Timeframe Chart, for more information on the Runs and timing for notice generation. See Exhibit 1.4.19-7, AUR Runs, for a complete list of AUR Runs and their descriptions.

Delete Process Codes

  1. Only the AUR Coordinator can delete unconfirmed PCs. If the PC is confirmed, the system displays a "Y" in the CONFIRMED field and an "N" in the DELETE field. This indicates the PC and any preceding IPC/PC cannot be deleted.

    Exception:

    A confirmed PC 34, 54, 58, 79 or 81 can be deleted.

  2. In order for the PC to be deleted the case must be transferred to and accepted by the AUR Coordinator. To delete an IPC/PC:

    1. Select the tax year from the AUR Year menu.

    2. Select Control from the AUR main menu.

    3. Select Case from the Control menu.

    4. Select Delete pc from the drop-down menu. The Delete Process Code screen displays with the cursor in the SSN field.

    5. Enter the SSN to display the current batch and PC information for the case. The cursor moves to the DELETE field.

    6. Enter "Y" to delete the IPC/PC.

    7. Press <F4> to commit.

    8. Transfer the case back to the originator for continued processing.

Message of the Day

  1. Any user who has the AUR Coordinator or the HQ Analyst profile codes (9000 or 9999) has the ability to create and send a Message Of The Day (MOTD) to all AUR users.

  2. To access MOTD screen and create an MOTD:

    To Then
    Create Message of the day
    1. Select Security from the AUR Tax Year menu.

    2. Select Create msg of the day from the drop-down menu. The MOTD screen displays.

    3. The CREATED BY field automatically populates with the creators name.

    4. The START DATE and END DATE fields require entries. Enter a start date and an end date in MM/DD/YYYY format.

      Note:

      Messages automatically display between these dates when the user logs on.

    5. The TITLE field requires an entry. Type in a title and press <Enter>. The Create/Edit Note window displays.

    6. Type the message in the space provided, click on the Spellcheck button and make corrections as needed.

    7. Click the Save button.

    8. Press <F4> to commit.

      Note:

      Another MOTD may be entered by pressing <F7>.

    9. To exit the MOTD screen press <F8>.

    Edit a MOTD

    Note:

    The MOTD should only be edited by the creator. If the MOTD has expired it can’t be edited, you must create a new MOTD.

    1. Select Security from the AUR Tax Year menu.

    2. Select Create msg of the day from the drop-down menu. The MOTD screen displays.

    3. Click on the History Tab.

    4. Click on the Control Number of the message you want to edit.

    5. Press <CTRL E> to display the MOTD.

    6. Edit the message.

    7. Click on the Spellcheck button and make corrections as needed.

    8. Click the Save button.

      Note:

      The following Message is displayed: "WARNING: YOU MUST COMMIT THIS SCREEN BEFORE EXITING OR MESSAGE WILL BE LOST" . Once you acknowledge this warning the cursor returns to the History tab.

    9. Press <F4> to commit.

    10. Press <F8> to exit.

    View the history of all the MOTDs input to the system

    Note:

    The history provides the Start date, End date, Created by, and message Title

    1. Click on the desired MOTD title

    2. The MOTD Message Text window displays. Press <F8> to exit without printing.

    3. Click the Display/Print MOTD button to print the message text.

Computer-Generated Interest for the CP 2000 Notice

  1. AUR uploads data to request an interest computation from IDRS for all CP 2000 notices. A PC 09 posts to IDRS pending the interest computation on PC 55 only.

  2. Service Center Replacement System (SCRS) downloads the interest amount or a reject code. If a valid interest amount is received by AUR, the entire CP 2000 notice information is uploaded. If a reject code is received, the case prints to the Reject Listing.

Unlocated Returns or Source Documents

  1. The system automatically reorders the return or source document for all cases not built into the specified batch type for a specific extract by the date established by the AUR Coordinator. The system assigns these cases to BT 30. If the case is not built into BT 31 within 60 days, the system closes the case with PC 29.

IDRS Case Control

  1. IDRS control bases are opened automatically, and initially displays as Status Code S when:

    • A CP 2501 PC is uploaded to IDRS.

    • A CP 2000 PC is uploaded to IDRS for an interest computation. IDRS displays a PC 09 to indicate the pending interest request prior to uploading the CP 2000 PC.

  2. The IDRS control base is automatically updated each time a new notice is issued. The IDRS control number ends with:

    • 02000 for a CP 2000

    • 02501 for a CP 2501

    • 05601 for a Stat notice

      Note:

      The IDRS case status updates to "M" when a Stat notice is issued.

    • 00095 for a recomputed notice after a Stat notice

  3. The CP 2501 IDRS control base is automatically closed when PCs 10, 15, 35-38, 44, 47, 48, and 51-53 are posted.

  4. The CP 2000 and Stat Notice IDRS control base are automatically closed when PCs 10, 15, 62-74, 80, 82-94 and 96 are posted.

  5. The IDRS Control base is opened and closed when a PC 20 is updated to Master File. The IDRS control number is 00020.

Charge-outs (Form 4251, Return Charge-Out)

  1. Initial charge-outs (Form 4251) are produced and routed to the campus files area for paper returns and source documents.

    1. If the paper return has not been retired to the FRC, the campus files area pulls the return and routes to AUR Operations.

    2. If the paper return has been retired to FRC, the campus files area routes the charge-out to the appropriate FRC. The FRC pulls the return and routes to AUR Operations.

  2. All ELF Returns are auto batched, charge-outs are not printed for these cases. These are referred to as Virtual Batches or Virtual cases.

Suspense Files Timeframes

  1. The following timeframes are applied to the appropriate suspense file:

    1. CP 2501 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    2. APO/FPO/DPO or Foreign Address CP 2501 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    3. CP 2501 Letters - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    4. CP 2000 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    5. APO/FPO/DPO or Foreign Address CP 2000 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    6. Recomputed or amended CP 2000 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    7. CP 2000 Letters - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    8. APO/FPO/DPO or Foreign Address recomputed CP 2000 - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    9. Stat Notices (CP 3219A and Form 5564) - ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

    10. APO/FPO/DPO or Foreign Address Stat Notices (CP 3219A and Form 5564) -≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

      Note:

      Verify the system is using the ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ to age Stat notices.

CP 2501 Timeframes
  1. Adhering to the following recommended timeframes ensures prompt action on all CP 2501 cases, minimizing cycle time to meet program goals.

    1. Disagreed responses - work on a first in, first out basis generally within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date.

    2. Agreed responses - download the PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date.

    3. Interim Letter 4314-C - when a quality response cannot be issued timely, an interim response must be issued within 30 calendar days of IRS received date. This applies to all cases where the closing action was not initiated within the 30-day timeframe established by Policy Statement P-21-3. The interim letter should include the name and phone number of a person to contact and an approximate date when the next or final letter will be issued.

    4. All subsequent taxpayer correspondence not previously addressed must be issued within 30 calendar days of receipt in the campus.

    5. No response - download the CP 2000 notice PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 5 calendar days of system aging.

    6. Undeliverables with no better address - download the CP 2000 notice PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 30 calendar days of receipt in AUR.

      Note:

      Whenever the inventory (age) permits special attention should be given to CP 2501s and STATs to minimize cycle time.

CP 2000 Timeframes
  1. Adhering to the following recommended timeframes ensures prompt action on all CP 2000 cases, minimizing cycle time to meet program goals.

    1. Disagreed responses - work on a first in, first out basis generally within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date

    2. Agreed responses - download the PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date.

    3. Interim Letter 4314-C - when a quality response cannot be issued timely, an interim response must be issued within 30 calendar days of IRS received date. This applies to all cases where the closing action was not initiated within the 30-day timeframe established by Action 61/Policy Statement P-21-3.

      Note:

      The interim letter should include the name and phone number of a person to contact and an approximate date when the next or final letter will be issued.

    4. All subsequent taxpayer correspondence not previously addressed must be issued within 30 calendar days of receipt in the campus.

    5. No response - download the Stat notice PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 5 calendar days of system aging.

    6. Undeliverables with no better address - download the Stat notice PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 30 calendar days of receipt in AUR.

Statutory Notice Timeframes
  1. Adhering to the following recommended timeframes ensures prompt action on Stat notice cases:

    1. Docketed cases - send to Appeals by the ADMIN FILE DUE TO APPEALS date shown on the docket list for the case.

    2. Disagreed responses - work on a first in, first out basis generally within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date.

    3. Agreed responses - download the PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date.

    4. Interim Letter 4314-C - when a quality response cannot be issued timely, an interim response must be issued within 30 calendar days of the IRS received date. This applies to all cases where the closing action was not initiated within the 30 - day timeframe established by Policy Statement P-21-3.

      Note:

      The interim letter should include a name and phone number of a person to contact and an approximate date when the next or final letter will be issued.

    5. No response - download the default PC (update batch to "RB" status) within 5 calendar days of system aging.

    6. Undeliverables - build to BT 85, Remail Stat Notice, within 30 calendar days of receiving the undelivered notice.

      Note:

      Whenever the inventory (age) permits special attention should be given to CP2501s and STATs to minimize cycle time.

Manual Statutory Notices

  1. Manual Stats must be created when PC 77 is used. When creating a manual Stat use the same notice date(s) as your regular Stat notices.

  2. As with other CP notices and letters, the following information must be kept current for Manual Stat Notices:

    • Commissioner’s name

    • Director’s name

    • Contact time

    • Stat Notice date

    • Person to contact

    • Stop number

    • IRS telephone number

Disclosure to State Tax Agencies

  1. Various states have entered into Federal/State Exchange Programs with the IRS. These formalized agreements provide for the exchange of underreporter tax information with specific state tax agency representatives.

  2. The disclosure of information to state tax agencies is automated.

    1. Each quarter, the CP 2000 file is compared to the case history file. If a PC on the case history file indicates a case has been closed with an AUR automatic assessment (PC 67, 87 or 90) disclosure data is generated. This data is merged, sorted at the Detroit Computing Center, and transmitted to the Federal/State Exchange Program participants.

    2. Each state receives a separate file of their cases. Disclosure counts are sorted by state and used to produce a report for the Disclosure function.

Print Consolidation

  1. AUR notices are printed at one of two Correspondence Production Services, the Detroit Computing Center (CPS East) and the Ogden IRS campus (CPS West).

    • Brookhaven, Philadelphia, Andover and Atlanta notices are printed in Detroit, CPS East.

    • Austin, Fresno and Ogden notices are printed in Ogden, CPS West.

  2. The notices are printed (including Certified Mail Listings), stuffed and mailed from the CPS sites.

  3. CPS sends each site the postmarked United States Postal Service Certified Mail Listing(s). See IRM 1.4.19.2.7, Maintaining Documents in AUR, for additional information on retaining certified listing.

  4. If it is necessary to retrieve a certified listing once it has been shipped to the FRC, use Optional Form (OF) 11 to request the listing. The Form and instructions can be found at http://www.archives.gov/frc/reference-services.html. .

Glossary and Abbreviations

The terms below are frequently used items used in the AUR program.

Term Definition
Agreed Case A response from the taxpayer with signature(s) agreeing to our changes with no disputing comments, OR full payment of tax and penalties received before the issuance of a Statutory Notice of Deficiency, with no comments, OR a completed Installment Agreement with signature(s) and no comments.
Assessments (TC 290/291) A change to the amount of tax on the taxpayer’s account; generates a bill or a refund, a new DLN, and/or releases payment and/or freeze code.
AUR Received Date A system generated date reflecting when the IRS Received Date is input on the AUR case record.
Auto-Generated Notice (AGN) Cases systemically screened and the CP 2000 Notice issued with no TE or clerical handling.
Automated Underreporter (AUR) Inventory control system used in Underreporter.
Bar Code Contains the SSN and the tax year and is used for scanning information into the control computer, using a laser gun. It is found on the lower right corner of the Form 4251 and on several pages of notices.
Batch A collection of returns, correspondence, or cases that have been grouped together.
Batch Number A five-digit number used to describe/define the type of batch and the sequential number of the batch or the physical location of the batch.
Batch Runs Automatic updates to the entire AUR system, currently scheduled for weekends only.
Batch Status Codes A two-digit alpha codes defining the status of a batch at any given time during AUR processing.
Batch Type (BT) The first two-digits of a batch number describing the type of work within the batch.
Case Analysis The technical review of computer identified discrepancies compared to the tax return. The Screening phase of the Underreporter Program is referred to as either Screening or Analyzation.
Case Sequence Number (CSN) A nine-digit number which indicates the exact physical location of a case.
Centralized Authorization File (CAF) Houses Power of Attorneys (POA) and other authorized disclosure contacts for taxpayer accounts.
Correspondence Production Services (CPS) AUR notices are printed and mailed from one of two CPS. CPS-East is in Detroit and prints/mails for Andover, Atlanta, Brookhaven and Philadelphia. CPS-West is in Ogden and prints/mails for Austin, Fresno and Ogden.
CP 2000 A notice sent to the taxpayer proposing an adjustment to an item of income, deductions, and/or credit and includes an explanation of the adjustment and a tax computation reflecting the adjustment. If the taxpayer fails to respond or if the response is insufficient, the Service sends a Statutory Notice of Deficiency.
CP 2005 Closing letter issued to taxpayer.
CP 2006 Acknowledgement letter.
CP 2501 An initial notice sent to the taxpayer requesting an explanation to resolve a discrepancy between items reported by the taxpayer on the tax return and the information provided by third parties regarding those items. If the taxpayer fails to respond or if the response is insufficient, the Service sends a CP 2000 notice proposing an adjustment.
Disagreed Case A response from the taxpayer that does not agree to our proposed changes OR has disputing comments attached. (Full payment received after issuance of the Stat Notice of Deficiency must be considered disagreed until signature(s) are obtained.)
Document Locator Number (DLN) The number assigned to all returns and documents input to the IRS computer system.
Employer Identification Number (EIN) Nine-digit number formatted XX-XXXXXXX used to identify businesses/payers.
Extract A group of SSNs selected from the inventory of cases identified with possible discrepancies.
Federal Record Center (FRC) A place where tax returns are stored outside the campuses.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) The method used to move information from AUR to Master file.
Form 4251 - Return Charge-Out The form generated from IDRS tape, used by Files/FRC to pull the requested returns.
Integrated Submission and Remittance Processing Automated system that converts all paper documents to electronic form, including payments.
Internal Process Code (IPC) A two-digit numeric/alpha code used for tracking cases on the AUR system (does not upload to IDRS).
IRS Received Date Date the IRS received the taxpayer correspondence or notice in the campus. It can usually be found on the first page of the receipt and is a stamp (round or square) containing the campus name and date the IRS received the correspondence in the campus.
Location Code A three-digit code that can be alpha or numeric. It identifies the place, generally a unit, where batches and/or cases can be found.
Lost Case (LC) A case that cannot be located where the system indicates it should be.
Priority Responses Responses aged beyond recommended timeframes, also referred to as Expedites or Early Received Date Responses.
Process Codes (PC) Two-digit numbers used to identify the action taken on a case. PCs reside in AUR and are uploaded to IDRS. When posted to IDRS, they update the TC 922 date.
Recomputed Notice A notice in which the original CP 2000 figures were changed due to a taxpayer response.
Reconsideration Cases Responses received after the case has been closed (assessment or no change) on the AUR system, also referred to as first read, late response or audit reconsideration cases.
Referral Case sent to another area for technical determination (for example: Examination, Criminal Investigation).
Refile Case (RF) Return a case to a suspense batch before further assignment.
Research Request for additional information (returns, IDRS research, information return files) needed to continue case processing.
Response Correspondence received from or on behalf of the taxpayer.
Restricted Cases Cases identified with restricted cases indicators in the AUR system. A restricted indicator is used to identify cases for special monitoring.
Review Sampling Cases to be reviewed by Management or quality reviewers.
Screening Technical review of computer identified discrepancies compared against the tax return. The Screening phase of the Underreporter Program is also referred to as Case Analysis and Analyzation.
Sequence Order Order in which cases are key entered or scanned into AUR.
Social Security Number (SSN) Nine-digit number formatted XXX-XX-XXXX used to identify individual taxpayers.
Statutory Notice Legal notification sent to taxpayers by Certified mail, which explains the taxpayers right to file a petition with Tax Court and the IRS right to change tax without taxpayer consent, if no timely petition is filed. An Underreporter Stat Notice consists of a Banner Page (if system generated), the Statutory Notice of Deficiency includes a CP 3219A, Waiver Form 5564 and reprint of the CP 2000 notice.
Taxpayer Information File (TIF) Individual Master File data from ECC-MTB (Martinsburg Computing Center) containing tax account and tax transaction information.
Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) Used to identify taxpayer accounts
Taxpayer Digital Communication (TDC) Communication via secure messaging
Undeliverable Correspondence returned from the Post Office that the taxpayer did not receive.
Universal View Case (UVC) The capability to view all case data by all AUR sites (and some non-AUR functions) regardless of where the case was initiated.
Universal Work Case (UWC) The capability to work (take all actions and assign PCs) by all AUR sites (and some non-AUR functions) regardless of where the case was initiated.
Virtual Batch All electronically filed returns (ELF) cases are auto batched into Screening BT 01-19 and are identified as a "Virtual batch" (no physical case). A "V" displays on the Batch Inventory Report next to the appropriate batch(s).
Virtual Case All electronically filed returns (ELF) cases are identified as a "Virtual Case" (no physical case). On system listings a "V" displays next to SSN to identify this type of case.
Virtual Indicator A Vdisplays on Case History, Listing and Reports to identify there is no physical case available.

The abbreviations below is a list of shortened forms of common terms used in the AUR program and their meaning.

Acronym Meaning
AGN Auto-Generated Notice
AIMS Audit Information Management System - Examination control system on IDRS
APO/FPO/DPO Army and Air Force Post Office/Fleet Post Office/Diplomatic Post Office - used to address correspondence to overseas military and diplomatic personnel.
AUR Automated Underreporter
BMF Business Master File
BOE Business Objects Enterprise
BT Batch Type
CAF Centralized Authorization File
CC Command Code
CCA Case Control Activity
CII Correspondence Imaging Inventory
CNGR Identifies a Congressional case
CPS Correspondence Production Services
CSN Case Sequence Number
DLN Document Locator Number
ECC-MEM Enterprise Computing Center at Memphis
ECC- MTB Enterprise Computing Center at Martinsburg
EIN Employer Identification Number
ELF Electronically filed return
EUR Employee Underreporter - IRS (government) employee cases in the Underreporter Program.
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
FRC Federal Record Center
FTP File Transfer Protocol
IAT Integrated Automation Technologies
IDRS Integrated Data Retrieval System
IMF Individual Master File
IND Indicator
IPC Internal Process Code
IRC Internal Revenue Code
IRM Internal Revenue Manual
IRMF Information Return Master File
ISRP Integrated Submission and Remittance Processing
KITA Killed In Terrorist Action
LC Lost Case
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCT Location
LOC Location
MOTD Message of the Day
O/D Over deducted
PC Process Code
POA Power of Attorney
PRP Indicates a Taxpayer Advocate Case.
RF IPC used to refile a case to a suspense batch before further assignment.
RPS Remittance Processing System within ISRP
SCRS Service Center Replacement System
SEID Standard Employee Identifier
SERP Servicewide Electronic Research Portal
SSN Social Security Number
SSO Systemic Screen-outs
SST Social Security Tax
TAS Taxpayer Advocate Service
TC Transaction Code
TDA Taxpayer Delinquent Account - a Collection status
TE Tax Examiner
TIF Taxpayer Information File
TIN Taxpayer Identification Number
TP Taxpayer
TY Tax Year
U/R Underreported
UVC Universal View Case
UWC Universal Work Case

AUR Internal Process Codes

Pre-Notice

IPC Definition
0A Screening Research Request for Tax Return
0D Miscellaneous Referral - Screening
0E Screening Technical/Manager Referral
0F Screening Fraud Referral
0P Screening Taxpayer Advocate-Area Office-Congressional Cases/Referrals
0T Screening Telephone

CP 2501

IPC Definition
3A CP 2501 Research Request – Return and/or Transcript
3D CP 2501 Referral
3E CP 2501 Technical/Manager Referral
3F CP 2501 Fraud Referral
3L Reserved
3P CP 2501 Taxpayer Advocate-Area Office-Congressional Cases/Referrals
3S Reserved
3T CP 2501 Telephone (Request Case)

CP 2000

IPC Definition
6A CP 2000 Research Request – Return and/or Transcript
6D CP 2000 Referral
6E CP 2000 Technical/Manager Referral
6F CP 2000 Fraud Referral
6L CP 2000 AUR Correspondex Letter
6P CP 2000 Taxpayer Advocate-Area Office-Congressional Cases/Referrals
6S CP 2000 Phone Call/Manual Letter (letter not on AUR)
6T CP 2000 Telephone (Request Case)
6X CP 2000 Extension Request
S6 CP 2000 Only one TP signature on consent (release AUR Correspondex letter and moves case to BT 89005 suspense)

Statutory Notice

IPC Definition
8A Statutory Research Request – Return and/or Transcript
8D Statutory Referral
8E Statutory Technical/Manager Referral
8F Statutory Fraud Referral
8L Statutory AUR Correspondex Letter – No Revision to Deficiency
8M Statutory AUR Correspondex Letter – Change to Deficiency
8P Statutory Taxpayer Advocate-Area Office-Congressional Cases/Referrals
8S Statutory Phone Call/Manual Letter (letter not on AUR)
8T Statutory Telephone (Request Case)
S3 Statutory Notice - Only one TP signature on Consent (releases AUR Correspondex letter and moves case to BT 89004 suspense
S6 Statutory Notice - Only one spouse files petition (moves case to BT 89006 suspense)

Miscellaneous - Open Cases

IPC Definition
CR Recomputation Notice after CP 2501 (Indicator 2 Only)
DR Recomputation Notice after Statutory Default date (Indicator 0 Only)
LC Lost Case
MC Manual Case
MI Manual Interest
RC Restore Case
RF Refile Case
RN Recomputation Notice Case (Indicators 7 and 8 Only)
SR Statutory Recomputation Notice (Indicators 7 and 8 Only)
WP Wrong Pull

Identity Theft

IPC Definition
SI Stolen Identity
S3 Statutory Notice - Only One TP Signature on Consent (releases AUR Correspondex Letter and moves case to BT 89004 suspense)
S6 CP 2000 Only One TP Signature on Consent (releases AUR Correspondex Letter and moves case to BT 89005 suspense)
S8 Statutory Notice - Only One Spouse Files Petition (moves case to BT 89006 suspense)
S9 Reserved

Reconsideration - Closed Cases

IPC Definition
9B RECON Research Required - suspense
9C RECON Information Request/Misc (BT 88) - closure
9E RECON Research/Referral within AUR - suspense
9F RECON Full Abatement of AUR the assessment - closure
9I RECON Information Request/Misc - closure
9L RECON Payer Letter - suspense
9N RECON No change to AUR assessment - closure
9P RECON Partial Adjustment- closure
9R RECON Referral non-AUR issue - closure

AUR Process Codes

U/R Case Selected

PC Definition
01 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
02 Reserved
03 AUR selected case
04 Reserved
06 AUR Employee Cases
08 Reserved
09 Establish IDRS Control Base - CP 2000 Interest Pending

Pre-Notice Transfer/Referral/Closures

PC Definition
10 DUP TIN closure
11 Field Audit
12 Office Audit
13 Campus Examination
14 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
15 Military Action/Disaster Closures
16 HQ Identified Program Problem - Closure
17 IDTVA Closure
18 KITA/ HSTG/KIA Closures

Pre-Notice Closures

PC Definition
20 Adjustment for withholding and/or excess SST/RRT discrepancies only
21 Discrepancy accounted for
22 Balance due/Refund below tolerance
23 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
24 Payer Agent
25 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
26 IDTVA Expired
27 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
28 Other Closure
29 Return cannot be secured

CP 2501 Notice - Transfer/Referral/Closure

PC Definition
30 CP 2501 (establishes IDRS Control Base)
31 Auto Notice Screen-out (Case systemically closed through auto notice programming
34 CP 2000 not mailed after a CP 2501 (PC 57)
35 Case closed to Field Audit (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
36 Case closed to Office Audit (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
37 Agreed CP 2501
38 Case Closed to Campus Exam (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
44 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
46 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
47 No change (closure letter CP 2005)
48 HQ Identified Program Problem (closure letter CP 2005)
51 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
52 No change (no closure letter)
53 Amended return closed case (no closure letter)
54 Notice CP 2501 not mailed

CP 2000 Notice - Transfer/Referral/Closure

PC Definition
55 CP 2000 (establish IDRS Control Base)
56 Reserved
57 CP 2000 after CP 2501
58 CP 2000 Notice not mailed
59 Recomputation (updates IDRS Control Base)
60 Amend/Recomp not mailed (PC 59 and amended PCs 55, 57 and 59)
61 Reserved
63 Case closed to Office Audit (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
64 Case closed to Campus Exam (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
65 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ (no acknowledgement letter)
66 Disagreed - Appeals Request - to Campus Examination (no acknowledgement letter)
67 Fully Agreed (no closure letter)
68 Adjustment to Prepayment Credits Only closures (no closure letter), Partial Adjustments
69 Taxpayers Agreed on Different Dates - Account Split
70 No change to original tax liability (closure letter, CP 2005)
71 No change to original tax liability closure (and HQ Identified Program Problem) (no closure letter)
72 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
73 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ (closure letter, CP 2005)
74 Other closure (closure letter, CP 2005)

Statutory Notice - Transfer/Referral/Closure

PC Definition
39 Taxpayers Agreed on Different Dates - Account Split
62 Non-petitioning Spouse Agreed
75 Statutory Notice - Updates IDRS Control Base
76 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ (no acknowledgement letter)
77 Statutory Notice - STN90 (computation change - not generated, input via IDRS CCSTN90)
78 Statutory Notice Rescinded
79 Statutory Notice not mailed
80 Transfer Docketed Cases to Appeals (no acknowledgement)
81 Recomp not mailed after Statutory Notice (PC 95)
82 Non-petitioning Spouse Default
83 Statutory case closed to Office Audit (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
84 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
85 Statutory case closed to Campus Exam (Acknowledgement letter, CP 2006)
86 Disagreed Statutory Case - Appeals Request
87 Fully Agreed (no closure letter)
88 Adjustment to Prepayment Credits Only closures (no closure letter) and Employee Case Partially Agreed
89 Taxpayers Agreed on Different Dates - Case Defaulted - Account Split
90 Assessed by default
91 No change to original tax liability (closure letter, CP 2005)
92 No change to original tax liability (no closure letter)
93 ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
94 Default assessments based on revision(s) to statutory Notice
95 Statutory Recomputation Notice
96 Other Closure (closes AUR system control for manual monitoring of active Bankruptcy cases or referral of non-bankruptcy cases to another area)

Miscellaneous

PC Definition
97 Response received - Correspondence sent for additional information
98 Bankruptcy Suspense (also applicable for Employee cases)
99 Reserved

Error Condition-Cause-Corrective Action Chart

ERROR CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
OWNER SEID TE who worked a case or work unit and has not released it. Instruct TE to complete and release the case or work unit.
NO PC A PC has not been assigned, or data changes require the PC be validated. If the case has not been worked, the case must be worked and a PC assigned. If the case has been worked, update the PC.
DEFECT A defect code indicator remains on the case.
  1. Select reView.

  2. Select Manager.

  3. Select Review.

  4. Select the Case Analysis screen, an * displays in the REVIEW ERROR field.

  5. Review the case to validate actions.

  6. Click on the REVIEW ERROR field to display a "Y" .

NEW TRN A new transaction has posted to the account.
  1. Assign the case, if necessary.

  2. Select the Tax Account screen, an * displays in the NEW TRANS field, identifying the new transaction(s).

  3. Place the cursor on each NEW TRANS field displaying an * and press <RETURN> or <F8> to access the new transaction, which saves time.

PC NOT VER Used by clerical function only. Clerical verifies PC.
PYR AGT A new payer agent has posted.
  1. Assign the case, if necessary.

  2. View the new payer agent information to see how it impacts the case.

  3. Rework the case.

  4. Update the PC.

REQUEST Used by clerical function only. Clerical transfers case to the requestor.
SPC PAR A special paragraph is present in the case.
  1. Select reView.

  2. Select Manager and Review.

  3. Select the Notice Paragraph window.

  4. Review the paragraph and make needed changes.

  5. Exit the window.

NEW CORR New correspondence from the taxpayer has been received.
  1. Contact clerical for the correspondence.

  2. Associate with the case.

  3. Assign the case to be reworked.

LTR PAR Open paragraph present on a Correspondex letter.
  1. Select reView.

  2. Select Manager and Review.

  3. Enter the SSN.

  4. Select the letter from the Reference tools.

  5. Display the letter with the open paragraph indicator and review.

  6. Use the edit function to make corrections or return the case to the TE for corrections.

  7. Accept the changes.

  8. Exit the window.

OVER $100K Over $100,000 tax increase.
  1. Select reView.

  2. Select Manager and Review.

  3. Select the Case Analysis screen.

  4. Enter the SSN.

  5. Review the case and return to the TE for corrections, if needed.

Notice Generation Timeframe Chart

Day Action
1st Sunday AURX032 is run to upload the PC 09, interest computation request.
2nd Sunday AURX084 is run to create the case labels.
2nd Monday-Friday Receive labeled folders.
3rd Sunday 1st pass of AURX082 creates: Sorts (AURX8242) Foreign Address Stats (AURX8245, Stat file copies (AURX8246), 1 copy of the Certified Mail Listing (AURX8247), Registered Mail List (AURX8248), CP long notices (AURX8249), and Long Stats (AURX8250).
3rd Monday-Friday Notice Review - pull and build cases to BT 95. Review the cases. Last week to use the Stop Notice function.
4th Sunday 2nd pass of the AURX082 creates only those notices to be mailed.
4th Monday Date used on all notices and notices mailed.

AUR Reports Matrix

Abbreviations Key for AUR

Abbreviation Meaning
AD After each download
AN As needed
D Daily
W Weekly
Q Quarterly
OE Ordering Extracts
C AUR Coordinator
CK Clerk
CM Clerical Manager
EURM Employee URP Manager
EURT Employee URP TE Lead
L Lead
M Manager
PA Payer Agent

REPORT Name OPTION RPT FREQ USED BY PURPOSE BOE
BATCH LISTINGS Seq-Num-SSN-PC AN C, CK, M Used to monitor the work. No
BATCH LISTINGS PC-Seq-Num-SSN AN C, CK, M Used to monitor the work. No
BATCH LISTINGS Seq-Num-SSN AN C, CK, M Used to monitor the work. No
BATCH INVENTORY Batch Type AN C, M, L Used to monitor specific batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY Association AN C, M, L Used to monitor batches in "AB" status. No
BATCH INVENTORY Screening AN C, M, L Used to monitor screening batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY CP 2501 AN C, M, L Used to monitor CP 2501 batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY CP 2000 AN C, M, L Used to monitor CP 2000 batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY Statutory AN C, M, L Used to monitor Stat batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY Complete AN C, M, L Used to monitor all batches. No
BATCH INVENTORY Unit Suspense AN C, M, L Used to monitor Individual unit inventory. No
BATCH INVENTORY Recon AN C Used to monitor Recon inventory. No
WEEKLY REPORT Inventory W C, M, L Provides a breakdown of total inventory. No
WEEKLY REPORT Weekly PC/IPC W C, M, L Lists all PC and IPCs with both weekly and CUM volumes. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT Aged Screening Research W C, M, L Lists SSNs in research suspense for more than 30 days. No
WEEKLY REPORT Open Transfers W C, M, L Lists transferred SSNs not accepted within 5 days. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT Aged Response Batch Summary W C, M, L Used to monitor the age of response batches. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT Notice/Letter W C, M, L Displays original and current notice volume and purge date. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT Extract Category W C, M, L Identifies category types in a specific extract. No
WEEKLY REPORT Statute W C, CK, M, L Lists all cases within 120 days of statute expiration. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT Reject Listing W C, CM, L Used to pull cases from suspense files. No
WEEKLY REPORT PC Status W C, M, L Used to monitor count of PCs. No
WEEKLY REPORT MISTLE W C, CM, M, L Used by Headquarters. No
WEEKLY REPORT Bankruptcy Status W C, M, L Used to identify and monitor Bankruptcy cases. Yes
WEEKLY REPORT UVC Summary W C, M Used to monitor Universal View case activity across the sites. Yes
REVIEW SAMPLING Product Review Sample AN C, M, L Used to identify product review of work in unit inventory. No
Batch IRS Received Date Batch IRS Received Date AN C, CM, M, L Used to monitor the age of responses in a batch. No
Unit Inventory Unit Inventory AN C, CM, M, L Used to monitor cases assigned to TEs by SEID or location. No
Cases in Error Cases in Error When updating batches to "BF" or "RB" status C, CK, CM, M, L Used to identify cases with error conditions in a batch. Yes
Statistical Statistical AN C Used to monitor assessments weekly, CUM or designated dates. Yes
Employee Open Inventory D EURT, EURM, C Used to monitor Employee cases. Yes
Employee Closed Inventory D EURT, EURM, C Used to monitor Employee cases. Yes
Employee Open Transfers D EURT, EURM, C Used to monitor Employee cases. Yes
Employee Auto Assessments D EURT, EURM, C Used to monitor Employee cases. Yes
Employee Employee Aging W EURT, EURM, C Used to monitor Employee cases. Yes
Recon Open Inventory D C, M, L Used to monitor Recon Inventory. Yes
Recon Closed Inventory D C, M, L Used to monitor Recon Inventory. Yes
Recon Aging D C, M, L Used to monitor Recon Inventory. Yes
Recon Issue D C, M, L Used to monitor Recon Inventory. Yes
Lost Case Batch Assign Date D C, CK, CM, M, L Used to research missing cases. No
Lost Case CSN D C, CK, CM, M, L Used to research missing cases. No
Lost Case SSN D C, CK, CM, M, L Used to research missing cases. No
Aging Disassemble Batch W CM, M, C Used to monitor cases in suspense that have not been batched to no response batches from "DC" status. Yes
Aging Complete Case W CM, M, C List of SSNs in Missing Data Suspense Batch where no data has been received and the appropriate suspense time has expired. Yes
Aging Suspense Aged Batch W C, CM Indicates which suspense batches have met the appropriate suspense timeframes. Yes
Aging Part Agreed AN C, M List of partially agreed cases (BT 67 and 87) in AB status more than 2 cycles. No
Aging Stat Not Generated W C, CM Provides a list of cases from the prior weeks' Statutory Notice mailout not receiving a Certified Mail Number. Yes
Auto Purge Auto Purge Pull List AN C, CM Lists cases containing conditions requiring TE review. Yes
Auto Purge Auto Purge Batch AN C, CM Lists cases remaining in BT 40, 47, 50, 505, 55, 60, or 70. Yes
Auto Purge RB Batches W C, CM Identifies BT 49, 59, and 79 systemically built and ready to be updated to RB status. Yes
Closed Research Missing Data W C, CM Lists system closed cases when the data is not secured. Yes
Closed Research Unavailable return W C, CM Lists system closed cases when the return is not secured. Yes
Notice Date List Notice Date List D C, CM, M, L Displays specific notice upload dates, notice dates and volumes for each notice type. Use to monitor program progress. Yes
Payer Agent List Payer Agent List AN C Lists all identified Payer Agents. Yes
Action 61 List Action 61 List D C Used to monitor volume of system generated Letter 4314-C. No
Pull Listings CSN D C, CK, CM Used to identify the location of cases within a response batch. Yes
Pull Listings Notice Date D C, CK, CM Used to identify the location of cases within a response batch. Yes
Auto-Assessment List Auto-Assessment List D CK, CM, C Used to verify cases are in the correct adjustment sequence for shipment to Document Retention. No
Reworked Cases Reworked Cases BT 95 update to BF C, CM, CK Identifies cases reworked during notice review. No
Miscellaneous Letter Miscellaneous Letter After batch update to RB C, CM, CK Identifies cases with manual letters. Yes
Check Notice/Letter Date Listing Check Notice/Letter Date Listing After building BT 49, 59, 79 CK, CM, C Displays cases missing after no response batch cases have been built. No
Undelivered New Actions Undelivered New Actions After BT 59 is RBd CK, CM, C Used to pull cases with new actions. No
Undelivered Report Undelivered Report AN CM, C Tracks the volume of undeliverables and those with new addresses by notice type. Yes
Address Update Report Address Update Report After BT 59 update CK, CM Displays cases with a new address received since building to BT 59. Yes
New Transactions New Transactions W C, CM Displays cases with new transactions since building to no response batches. Yes
New Payer Agent report New Payer Agent report AN C, PA Used to identify cases to be reworked due to new payer agent info. Yes
Reorder Date Reorder Date AN C Use to review the reorder date screen and not input a reorder date. Yes
Batch Released Batch Released AN C, CM, M, L Used to monitor batches BFd from units, daily, weekly, monthly. Yes
Over 8 References Over 8 References After BT 67 and 87 are RBd CK, CM, C Displays cases with more than 8 credit reference numbers. Yes
Suspense Summary Suspense Summary After batch update to RB CK, CM, C Aids in placing cases in the appropriate suspense file. Yes
Cancel Batch/Completed Work Unit Cancel Batch/Completed Work Unit Batch in AU status C, M Displays completed work units before updating to CB and at the time batch is being updated to AU in new location. No
Disaster Zip Code Disaster Zip Code AN C Used to monitor disaster zip codes in the system. Yes
Message of the Day Message of the Day AN C Used to view or print prior Message of the Day. No
Notice Review List Notice Review List W CM, C Provides a list of statistically valid sample of cases for notice review. No
RLS Batch RLS Batch AN C, M, CM, L Identifies cases worked and released by technical units not yet processed by clerical. Yes
UVC Action UVC Action AN C, M, L Identifies cases viewed by another site (per phone call) needing an action. Yes
Return Chargeout Return Chargeout AN C, M, L Used to reprint Form 4251 for an individual case or batch. Yes
UVC Activity UVC Activity AN C, M, L Displays a complete list of Universally accessed cases. Yes
UWC Activity UWC Activity AN C, M, L Displays a complete list of Universally worked cases. Yes
Disaster CSN/SSN Disaster CSN/SSN AN C, M, L Used to identify cases in designated disaster zip codes. Yes
Telephone Tracking Telephone Tracking AN C, M Used to track the volume of calls per specific income types. Yes
ADHOC ADHOC AN C Lists various specialized reports. No
Profile Reports (under Security menu) Unit Profile AN C, M Lists Unit employees by profile code. Yes
Profile Reports (under Security menu) Section Profile AN C, M Lists of Section employees by profile code. Yes
Profile Reports (under Security menu) Branch Profile AN C, M Lists Operation employees by profile code. Yes
AUR User List (under Security menu) SEID List AN C, M Lists all users in alphabetical order. Yes
AUR User List (under Security menu) Unit List AN C, M Lists users in a Unit by either SEID or name. Yes
AUR User List (under Security menu) Name List AN C, M Lists all users by Name in alphabetical order. Yes
Unit Status Error (under Security menu) Unit Status Error Day after updating a users status M Identifies cases assigned to users being put in non-work status. Yes

AUR Runs

AUR Runs Frequency of Report Report Title and Description
AURX001 Weekly Download IRP - The data in this run is provided from ECC-MTB via File Transfer Protocol (FTP) on the URP45 and loads the Underreporter Transcript information to the AUR database. This is run for every extract.
AURX003 Daily Download TIF - This run accepts file WTU1015 as input and contains the Taxpayer Information File (TIF). This run contains the TIF for each extract and weekly TIF updates.
AURX005 Weekly Download RTF - The data is provided from ECC-MTB via FTP on the URP65 and contains the Return Transaction File (RTF) or transcription lines from the taxpayer’s return when originally processed and subsequent actions. For every AURX001 there is a corresponding AURX005.
AURX006 Weekly Download TRDB - This is run for every extract and loads the electronic return information to the AUR database.
AURX006B Weekly Download MTRDB
AURX006C Weekly Download MTRDB Binary
AURX007 Weekending Download Payer Agent - This is a weekly run, which selects records from the Payer Agent table and updates the system with the new Payer Agent information.
AURX012 Weekending Document import - takes notice PDF documents and puts them into the database.
AURX013 Daily Download Certified Mail Number - IAP file listing of CNML (from USPS).
AURX015 Weekly Download Employee Cases - This program downloads employee SSNs and spouse SSNs to the IRS EMPLOYEE table. The data is used to update previously unidentified employee cases in AURX059. The AURX015 connects to all tax years.
AURX017 Weekending Download POA - This downloads Power of Attorney addresses into the AUR database from the 16093 run.
AURX019 Weekending Download Interest - This program updates the CP 2000 trans and CP 2000 history tables with interest as determined by the UR SCRS runs.
AURX020 Weekending Build CP 2501 Record - This run creates the AURX02020 for input to AURX080. This contains the data used to create the CP 2501. This run is performed on cases with a CP 2501 PC after the system has disassembled the batch and is run weekly.
AURX021 Weekending Build Stat Records - This run creates the AURX02120 for input to AURX082 which contains Stat Notice data on cases with Stat PC 75 after the system has disassembled the batch.
AURX022 Weekending Build CP 2000 Records - This run creates file AURX02220 for input to the AURX082. This run is performed on cases with a CP 2000 PC after the system has disassembled the batch.
AURX023 Weekending Upload POA Key - This program creates a file of Power of Attorney keys from the 16093 run. These keys are used to get updated POA information from Master file.
AURX024 Weekending Build AC Record - (CP 2005 closure, CP 2006 transfer) (queues AURX088).
AURX025 Weekly Check SADA - This program creates a file of Spouses at Different Address requests. These requests are input into URX34 and used to get new information about spouses with different addresses from the NAP.
AURX026 Daily Upload Correspondex - This program identifies new record values to request the creation of IDRS letters to be mailed.
AURX027 Weekending Build CP 2057 record.
AURX028 Daily Upload Research Request - This run creates a file for input to TRS90. It contains requests for tax returns or transcripts via TE request on AUR or automatic system reorder. This run is performed daily.
AURX029 Weekending Upload Pending Interest - This is an FTP process for input into URX23. The file contains data necessary to compute CP 2000 interest.
AURX030 Daily Upload Address Change/Assessments - This daily run creates a file of assessments and address change information. It is uploaded to EOD10, which updates IDRS and Master File.
AURX032 Weekending Upload PC - This program creates a file for input to URX53. The file can contain more than one set of PC data for each SSN. The PC Status Listing and MISTLE report are created from this data.
AURX033 Weekly Upload TRDB Request (with AURX089) - ELF & MEF AURX089 currently prints charge-outs, but eventually will not.
AURX034 Weekending Upload Third-Party - The output file is transmitted to ECC-MTB via FTP. This run connects all tax years and merges all Third-Party Contacts.
AURX039 Other Upload State Disclosure - This run contains the state disclosure data, which is sent to the state tax agencies. The information is generated by AURX049. This upload is run monthly. At the end of each quarter, three months of data is merged before being forwarded.
AURX041 Daily Part Agreed Notices - This run provides the functions necessary to upload CP notice (IPC RN/SR) information from BT 67 and/or BT 87 in "AB" status. The notice dates are systemically uploaded to create CP notices for the Taxpayer or to only update the new CP information on the database and not generate a notice.
AURX043 Other Auto Notice - This run produces cases for Extracts 27, 26, 25 with 28 Fallouts.
AURX044 Weekending Auto Batching - This run auto batches ELF/ cases.
AURX046 Daily Disassemble Batches - This run provides the functions necessary to disassemble a batch in "RB" status. Closure, Fraud, Research, Wrong Pull, Assessments, Notice/Letter cases are systemically or clerically built into a new batch, based on PC/IPC.
AURX047 Daily Disassemble Employee Batches - This run provides the functions necessary to disassemble employee cases in BTs 91 and 92.
AURX049 Weekending Create Disclosure Trans - This process prepares disclosure data from CP 2000 notices for states with disclosure agreements. If the case state code is for a participating state and the total adjustment amount is equal to or greater than the state tolerance level, processing continues, if not, the case is bypassed. IRs from foreign income cannot be disclosed to states - these are deleted from the total adjustment amount.
AURX057 Weekending Suspense Aging - This run performs functions necessary to perform aging processing.
AURX058 Weekending Employee Suspense Aging - This run performs functions necessary to perform employee aging processing.
AURX059 Weekly Update (Employee) Case Access - This module checks all primary and secondary SSNs against SSNs in IRS EMPLOYEE. The data is used to update previously unidentified employee cases in AURX059.
AURX060 Daily Sequence Employee Auto Assessment - This daily run creates a file of assessments for employee cases. It is uploaded to EOD10, which updates IDRS and Master File.
AURX061 Daily Delete Sequence Suspense - This run deletes empty batches after 30 days to allow re use of batch numbers.
AURX063 Weekending Auto Purge - This run systemically batches aged cases in the major suspense batches.
AURX067 Other Build Suspense Batches - This is the initial run that builds suspense batches for each location.
AURX071 Weekending Process Security Data - This run creates a log file for processing and updating the AUDIT TRAIL Table.
AURX075 Daily Produce Interim Response Letters - This process identifies and creates a record for cases meeting the criteria for automatic generation of a Letter 4314-C.
AURX084 Weekending Produce Suspense Labels - This run selects SSN and label data to produce bar-coded labels/folders for association with cases.

Note:

The current AUR Tax year reflects all open tax year information.

AURX087 Weekending X-Produce CP 2057
AURX112 Weekending Generate Weekly Reports - This run generates the various weekly reports. It determines if errors were encountered by counting the number of error files generated by the reports.
AURX117 Weekending Create Disposition Inventory Fl - This process produces an assessment report, which provides a total of closed cases with an assessment PC and the average yield per case by Subfile, Category and Sub-category. This report can be pulled by date.
AURX118 Daily Produce Employee AUTO Assessment Report - The run produces a listing of employee auto assessment cases and the order they must go to files.
AURX119 Other Produce Monthly Discrepancy Report (Pacific Consulting Group)
AURX08120 Weekending X- Produce Stat - print - This run produces Stat notices for print.
AURX08225 Weekending X- Produce CP 2000 - review - This run produces CP 2000 notices for review. This run also provides the volume of CP 2000 for the On-line Notice Review Process.
AURX080125 Weekending X- Produce CP 2501 - review - This run produces CP 2501 notices for review. This run also provides the volume of CP 2501 for the On-line Notice Review Process.
AURX080220 Weekending X- Produce CP 2501 - print - This run produces CP 2501 notices for print.
AURX080225 Weekending X- Produce CP 2501 - review - This run produces CP 2501 notices for review which have a sort code. This run also provides the volume of CP 2501 for the On-line Notice Review Process.
AURX081120 Weekending X- Produce Stat - print
AURX081125 Weekending X- Produce Stat - review This run produces Stat notices for review. This run also provides the volume of Stat for the On-line Notice Review Process.
AURX082120 Weekending X- Produce CP 2000 - print
AURX082125 Weekending X- Produce CP 2000 - review
AURX082220 Weekending X - Produce CP 2000- print - This run produces CP 2000 notices for print.
AURX082225 Weekending X- Produce CP 2000 - review sort codes
AURX088120 Weekending Produce Acknowledgement / Closure Letter - This run produces acknowledgement and closure letters (CP 2005 and CP 2006).
AURX089123 Weekly Produce Return Charge-out - This run produces the initial Form 4251. The charge-out information is created from an FTP file (UR62) provided by ECC-MTB. The Form 4251, requests the controlling DLN from files. AUR creates an FTP file for ELF cases.

AUR Task Codes

AUR Task Code Description
101 LOGON
102 LOGOFF
103 UNSUCCESSFUL LOGON ATTEMPTS
104 INVALID LOGON STATUS
105 UNLOCK USER SEID
123 CHILD TAX CREDIT
124 FTHB CREDIT
133 ADDITIONAL CHILD TAX CREDIT
203 VIEW CASE
212 CASE HISTORY
300 ANALYSIS
302 IR NOTE
303 PAYER AGENT
305 CREATE IR
306 MODIFY IR
307 INCOME COMPARISON
311 CREATE GROUP
318 UNGROUP
321 CASE NOTE
322 NOTICE PARAGRAPH
324 TAX ACCOUNT
325 RESEARCH
327 LETTERS
328 ASSESSMENT
329 UPDATE ADDRESS
331 RETURN VALUE
332 IRA
333 WITHHOLDING
334 EXCESS SST/RRTA
335 SITR
336 SSA/RRB
337 LUMP SUM AVG
338 SEP KEOGH
339 DEPENDENT CARE
340 SCHEDULE D LOSS
343 SCHEDULE A
344 STANDARD DEDUCTION
345 NEW TAX - 8615
347 CHILD CARE
348 SCHEDULE R ELDERLY/DISABLED CREDIT
349 OTHER CREDITS
351 SST TIPS
352 SCHEDULE SE
353 ALT MIN TAX
354 OTHER TAXES
356 EARNED INCOME CREDIT
358 EST TAX PENALTY
359 LIMITED PENALTIES
360 SUMMARY
363 SCHEDULE D/8814 TAX
364 SAVING BOND EXCLUSION
365 PROCESS CODE
366 MISC ADJUSTMENT/SCHEDULE C EXPENSES
367 EDUCATION CREDIT
368 SCHEDULE J
369 RETIREMENT SAVINGS CREDIT
371 CASE
373 ASSIGN CASE
374 RELEASE CASE
376 TRANSFER CASE
377 ACCEPT CASE
380 REQUEST CASE
388 LIMITED CREDIT
389 TUITION AND FEES
393 FICA TAX
394 STOP NOTICE
395 NEG/REASONABLE CAUSE STATUS
396 CHANGE TAXPAYER AGE
397 NET INVESTMENT INCOME TAX
398 PREMIUM TAX CREDIT
399 SHARED RESPONSIBILITY PAYMENT
432 CASESEID
435 RESTORE CASE
501 PASSWORD (USER CHANGES)
502 PROFILE REQUEST
506 TEMP PASSWORD
507 USER ACCOUNT HISTORY
600 REPORTS (AUR)
706 NOTICE/LETTER DATE
708 CONTROL PARAMETER
710 LOCAL CP 2000 PARA
712 REORDER DATES
713 UPDATE LETTER PARAMETERS
733 DISPLAY TAXPAYER INFORMATION
801 FRAUD
802 DISCLOSURE WINDOW
803 CASE NOTE ACTION REQUIRED
804 PROCESS CODE INDICATORS

AUR Category Code Descriptions/Chart

AUR Category Code Descriptions
01 100 percent Mortgage and/or points paid
02 IRAs Over-deducted on Form 5498
04 NEC
05 50 percent Gross Receipts w/NEC/Fishing income/Bartering
07 Wages
08 SSB/RRB
09 100 percent Interest or Dividends
10 Interest
11 Dividends
12 Pure Wages/Interest/Dividends/Combination
13 Pensions and Annuities (1099-R) Taxable
14 Pensions and Annuities (1099-R) Gross
15 Interest and/or Dividends AND Pension and Annuity Combination (10 and/or 11 with 13 and/or 14 combo)
16 Withholding (WH), over/underclaimed
17 Fishing Income, no MED and/or NEC
19 Rents and Royalties
20 Farm Income
21 Medical Payments, no Fishing and/or NEC
22 Income /Loss from Partnership and S Corps, Form 1065 and Form 1120-S
23 Income/Loss from Estates and Trusts, Form 1041
24 Gambling
25 Taxable Grants
27 Other Income
28 Payments in Lieu of Dividends
29 Cancellation of Debt
30 Qualified Tuition Program Earnings
31 Securities Sales - 100 or fewer IRs, Form 1099-Bs, Sch D present
32 Early Withdrawal Penalty(EWPEN)
33 Unemployment Compensation
34 INT Combination with Interest $100 or more
35 State Income Tax Refund
36 Mortgage interest paid and/or points paid and/or Mort Ins Premium, Form 1098 present
37 SEP/SIMPLE Contribution
38 Reemployment Trade Adjustment Assistance (RTAA) payments
39 Securities Sales - more than 100 Form 1099-B, Schedule D present
40 Gross Capital Gain distributions from dividends
41 Combination
42 Early Distribution 10 percent Tax ($150 or more)
43 Bartering Income Discrepancy
44 Dependent Care Benefits(DCB)
45 IRA Overdeduction AGI dollar limitation
46 Excess FICA
50 Self-Employment (SE) Income Discrepancy
51 Taxable Pension and Annuity Distribution or Gross Pension and Annuity Distribution Discrepancy
55 Statutory Wages
57 NEC on Schedule F and/or Form 4835
59 Medical Savings Account (MSA) Contribution
61 Securities Sales, 100 or fewer Form 1099-B, No/Blank Sch D
62 Overdeducted Student Loan Interest Deduction (SLID) greater than $600
63 Health Saving Account (HSA) Distributions
64 Health Saving Account (HSA)Contributions
65 Real Estate Income Discrepancy
66 Taxable Pension and Early Distribution 10 percent Tax
67 Mortgage and/or points paid over-deduction - no Form 1098
68 Over-deducted Tuition and Fees - no Form 1098-T
69 Education Credits (over claimed) - no Form 1098-T
70 SSB/RRB plus Taxable Pension discrepancy
71 Wages and/or Withholding discrepancy
72 Underreported Payment Card, greater than $100 U/R
79 Securities Sales, over 100 Form 1099-B, No/blank Sch D
99 When case cannot be assigned to Categories 01 - 05 or 7-79, contains IRA and another discrepancy

Subfile Key Descriptions

Subfile Key Description
1 CTR Cases
2 IRS Employees
6 All Other Taxpayers (non-IRS), AGI per return is between $50,000 and $124,999
8 Cases with a Form 1099-K income of $100 or more
9 Returns filed with ITIN
B Credit Tax Change (W/H)
C Stock, Bond and/or Real Estate Discrepancy (Form 1099)
D UR Income Greater Than $10,000
E UR and EIC
F Mortgage Interest Over-deduction
G UR Income Greater than $10,000/Repeaters
H 1040NR (International with ITIN) ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
I Potential Unproductive Repeaters ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
J Auto-Generated Notice
K Discrepancy from associated EIN Document
L Multi-year Repeater
M Cases with Sch K-1 Discrepancy of $100 or more
P Identity Theft cases with posted TC 971 w/AC 5XX
S 1040NR (International with SSN) ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
T AGI per return is less than $50,000
U AGI per return is $125,000 or more

Sub-Category Code Potential Tax Change
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡
≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡ ≡

Batch Status Codes

Batch Status Definition/Meaning
RT (RTF Download) - RTF Data has been downloaded for an extract.
Blank (No Status) - The batch status code is updated either by the user or the AUR system in workflow order. As work is assigned to a new batch type from a suspense batch type, the batch status reverts to a blank value (batch is being assembled) to begin the cycle again, in workflow order. Also referred to as "unassociated."
AB (Associated Batch) - batch association is completed.
AG (Aged Batch) - batch has met appropriate suspense timeframes.
CB (Cancel Batch) - unit has canceled the batch.
AU (Assigned to Unit) - batch is assigned to technical unit.
BF (Batch Finished) - batch has completed technical unit processing.
RB (Release Batch) - batch is released by the clerical function.
DC (Disassembly Complete) - after "RB" has been disassembled by the clerical function.
SB (Suspense Batch) - batch is suspended.
XX Batch may be placed in "XX" status during nightly or weekend processing and requires attention. Contact the AUR Coordinator.

Batch Status Codes can be assigned in the following order:

CURRENT UPDATE TO
Blank (No Status) AB
AB Blank
CB AB, this record shows CB until it is deleted. The batch shows AB status so it may be scheduled again.
AU BF
BF RB
RB DC
DC Will always stay DC
SB Will always stay SB

Mandated IAT Tools

Action IAT Tool
AUR Reconsiderations xMend
REQ54
REQ77
Address
Letters
e-Clerical
Credit transfer
Fill Forms
Manual Refund
Stop Refund (CC NOREF)
Issue a Letter (unable to generate through AUR system) Letters
Make adjustment to TP account (unable to complete through AUR system) REQ54
When TC 971, 972, 470, or 560 is needed REQ77
Ordering a return/document (unable to order through AUR system) eClerical
Move payments Credit Transfer
Send a document to files (Form 9856) Fill Forms tool
Manual Refund Manual Refund
Researches IDRS and filters the results to assist with locating TC codes. TC Search

Additional IAT Tools Available (Use Not Mandated)

Action IAT Tool
Research IDRS for specific Recon (Reconsideration) conditions Clerical Recon Screening
Perform security command codes in regards to employee profiles, terminals or Quality Review. Managers Security (MST)
Access common command codes assigned to the user in IDRS based on the user’s permissions access Quick CC (QCC)
Researches Code databases Code Search Index (CSI)